JP6286927B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a speaker as sound output means, and the speaker outputs a variety of performance sounds according to the gaming state, so that the degree of attention to the game can be increased. In addition, since the output sound from the speaker is used as a notification sound, it is possible to notify the state of the gaming machine or notify the occurrence of fraud.

  The speaker outputs sound when a sound signal is input from the amplifier, and the sound volume output from the speaker is determined by setting the amplification factor of the sound signal by the amplifier. In a gaming machine in which the amplification factor of the amplifier is variably set, the output volume from the speaker can be changed according to the amplification factor of the amplifier. For example, in a gaming machine provided with a volume switch, the amplification factor of the amplifier is changed by operating the volume switch, thereby changing the output volume from the speaker (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-261808 A

However, if the volume level of the sound signal input to the speaker is higher than the allowable input level of the speaker, the sound may not be properly output from the speaker .

The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately outputting sound from sound output means.

  Hereinafter, means for solving the above problems will be described.

The present invention
Amplifying means for amplifying the sound signal;
Sound output means for outputting sound at a volume corresponding to the volume level of the sound signal by inputting the sound signal amplified by the amplification means;
With
The amplifying means and the sound output means are electrically connected by a sound output path, and the sound signal amplified by the amplifying means is input to the sound output means through the sound output path. There,
The sound signal amplified by the amplification means is input through the branch path, and the volume level of the sound signal exceeds a predetermined reference level. Equipped with an over-level detection circuit that detects
The over-level detection circuit includes:
Peak holding means for holding the peak value of the volume level of the sound signal as a hold value;
Comparing means for comparing the hold value held by the peak holding means with the reference level,
Volume level of the sound signal is characterized in der Rukoto which detects that exceeds the reference level based on a comparison result of the comparing means.

According to the present invention, it is possible to appropriately output sound from the sound output means .

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of an outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of an outer frame. It is a cross-sectional view of a lower speaker part and its periphery. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a main body frame. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the fraud detection process performed in main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for an electromagnetic wave detection performed with main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop determination process performed in main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process performed in main MPU. (A) is the schematic which shows the kind of fluctuation | variation display aspect, (b) group is the schematic which shows the outline | summary of each fluctuation | variation display aspect. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for a hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a pending | holding command. 10 is a flowchart showing a payout state detection process executed by a payout control device 78. It is a flowchart which shows the payout state reception process performed in main MPU. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure which concerns on execution control of production. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure of direct ROM, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure of common ROM. 3 is a circuit diagram showing an electrical configuration of a sound crack detection circuit 175. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the detection aspect of the sound crack detection circuit 175. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting and effect control processing which are performed by sub MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the response | compatibility process of the pending | holding command performed in sub MPU. It is a flowchart which shows operation | movement in the sound data processing part provided in sound output LSI. It is a flowchart which shows the volume setting process performed in sub MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the volume setting process of the guidance sound performed in sub MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the volume restriction | limiting cancellation | release process performed in sub MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the volume setting process of the production sound performed with subMPU. It is a flowchart which shows the volume harmony processing performed in sub MPU. It is a time chart which illustrates the change mode of the real volume level of the sound signal input into each speaker. It is a flowchart which shows the volume restriction | limiting cancellation | release process of the effect sound performed in sub MPU. It is a time chart which illustrates the change mode of the real volume level about a speaker. It is a circuit diagram which shows the electric constitution of the sound crack detection circuit 175 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the volume limitation cancellation | release process of the effect sound performed in sub MPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the volume cancellation | release stage cancellation | release process performed in sub MPU. It is a flowchart which shows another volume setting process performed in sub MPU.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an unfolded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  The pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a backpack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side. It is possible to move.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and the gaming machine main body 12 is locked to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. And has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24.

  The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port 33, a lower operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a main display unit 43, an accessory display unit 44, and the like. ing.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 24, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In this case, when a ball enters the upper working port 33 and when a ball enters the lower working port 34, the payout of three prize balls is executed. When it occurs, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a prize is entered into the variable winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in both the operation holes 33, 34 is larger than the number of prize balls in the lower action opening 34 than the number of prize balls in the upper action opening 33. It may be different. Further, the number of winning balls related to the variable winning device 32 is not limited to a configuration that is larger than the number of other winning balls, and may be configured to be smaller than the number of winning balls related to the general winning opening 31, for example.

  In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 37. In addition, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 38 and various members such as a windmill in order to appropriately distribute and adjust the falling direction of the game ball.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 37, the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, or the through gate 35 are entered. The entry of a game ball is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and are installed in the game board 24. Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 33 is on the upper side. The lower working port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece made up of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The electric combination 34a is connected to an electric combination driving unit 34b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the electric combination driving unit 34b and arranged in either a closed state or an open state. . In the closed state of the electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot be won in the lower operation port 34, and when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it is possible to win the lower operation port 34.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there is a motorized state in which a winning of a game ball to the lower working port 34 is likely to occur and a state in which a winning is less likely to occur than a state in which winning is not impossible but is likely to occur. It is good also as a structure by which the accessory 34a is switched. Further, the electric accessory 34a may be omitted, and switching between a state in which a winning is likely to occur and a state in which a winning is less likely to occur is performed by the displacement of the lower operation port 34 itself.

  The variable winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24 and an open / close door 32a that opens and closes the large winning opening. The open / close door 32a is connected to a variable prize driving unit 32b provided integrally as the variable prize device 32, and is driven by the variable prize driving unit 32b to be arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the game ball is normally closed so that it cannot win, and the game ball can be switched to an open state in which the game ball can win when it is elected to shift to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery. By the way, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode that is shifted to when a big win or a special loss occurs. Note that, in the closed state, winning may not be impossible, but it may be configured such that winning is less likely to occur than in the open state.

  In the main display unit 43, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning at the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 is achieved. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the display is clearly shown. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, the winning to the upper working port 33 and the winning to the lower working port 34 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and are performed based on the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. The result of the internal lottery is displayed on the main display unit 43 which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 43. After the display and the change display are stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The main display unit 43 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as CRT or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the main display unit 43, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality A configuration in which the color of the seed is switched and displayed can be considered.

  In the accessory display unit 44, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning to the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 35 is displayed as a result of stopping the variation display. Explicit by display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 35 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the state where the electric role is opened, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 for variably displaying a symbol which is a kind of symbol, and a center frame 42 is provided so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and a dot matrix display. It may be a vessel.

  In the symbol display device 41, the variation display of the symbol is started based on winning in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. That is, when variable display is performed on the main display unit 43, variable display is performed on the symbol display device 41 accordingly.

  The display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the display surface G of the symbol display device 41.

  Although illustration is omitted, a symbol which is a kind of symbol is composed of nine types of main symbols each having numerals “1” to “9” and sub-patterns composed of shell-shaped symbols. . More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display surface G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, on the display surface G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is like that. On the display surface G, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5 are set.

  When a game-turning effect is performed on the display surface G based on winning at the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display is started. Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the game is used in a state where a predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 The production of is ended.

  In addition, when the effect for the game round ends, if it is a game round corresponding to the occurrence of a highly accurate big hit result, which will be described later, a combination of symbols in which the same odd number is attached to any active line is formed. In the game times corresponding to the occurrence of a low probability winning result to be described later, a combination of symbols in which the same even number is attached to any one of the active lines is formed. The contents of each jackpot result will be described later.

  In addition, based on the winning in one of the operation ports 33 and 34, the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41 start the variable display, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game time.

  Further, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described pattern, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a first hold light emitting portion (first hold lamp portion) 45 corresponding to the main display portion 43 and the symbol display device 41 is provided in the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 42. The maximum number of game balls won in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed when the first holding light emitting unit 45 is turned on.

  In the upper right part of the center frame 42, a second reserved light emitting unit (second reserved lamp unit) 46 corresponding to the accessory display unit 44 is provided. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to 4 times, and the number of the held balls is displayed by turning on the second holding light emitting unit 46. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the function of each holding | maintenance light emission part 45 and 46 is fulfill | performed by the display in the one part area | region of the symbol display apparatus 41. FIG.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the game board 24 is provided with a magnet detection sensor 47a and a radio wave detection sensor 47b as abnormality detection means.

  The magnet detection sensor 47 a is installed on the back side of the game board 24 around the upper working port 33. As described above, since the upper operating port 33 is a trigger for the internal lottery, an act of inducing the game ball to the upper operating port 33 illegally by bringing a magnet near the upper operating port 33 in front of the window panel 57. is assumed. On the other hand, when the magnet detection sensor 47a is provided, it is possible to detect an illegal act using the magnet. The magnet detection sensor 47a is electrically connected to a main controller described later, and the detection result of the magnet detection sensor 47a is input to the main controller.

  In addition, the position of the magnet detection sensor 47a is not limited to the above-described one. For example, in order to suppress an illegal act of illegally trying to win the general winning opening 31 using the magnet, A magnet detection sensor 47 a may be disposed around the general winning award 31.

  The radio wave detection sensor 47 b is installed on the back side of the game board 24 around the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34. In more detail about this position, the radio wave detection sensor 47b is disposed at substantially the same height position as both the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 in the height direction, and the upper operation port 33 and The game machine main body 12 is disposed on the rotation base end side of the lower operation port 34. Here, since a payout device (to be described later) for paying out the game ball is disposed at a position closer to the rotation base end side of the gaming machine main body 12, the radio wave detection sensor 47b has a working port device and a payout device in the lateral direction. It can be said that it is arranged between.

  As described above, the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are triggers for internal lottery. Therefore, the radio wave is illegally output toward the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 in front of the pachinko machine 10. The act which tries to make the detection sensor or the detection sensor of the lower operation port 34 misdetect the passage of the game ball is assumed. On the other hand, when the radio wave detection sensor 47b is provided, it is possible to detect an illegal act using the radio wave. The radio wave detection sensor 47b is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the detection result of the radio wave detection sensor 47b is input to the main control device.

  Note that the position of the radio wave detection sensor 47b is not limited to the above-described one, and may be, for example, closer to the rotating front end of the gaming machine body 12 than the operating port device. You may arrange | position in the height position between 32. The radio wave detection sensor 47b can detect radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz as a predetermined frequency, but can detect radio waves of a frequency that can cause erroneous detection to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. For example, the range of the frequency is arbitrary, and the frequency range to be detected may be changed.

  An inner rail portion 48 and an outer rail portion 49 are attached to the game board 24, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 48 and the outer rail portion 49, and a game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 51. A ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 51 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21, and is stored in a launch rail 52 extending toward the guide rail and an upper plate 61a described later. A ball feeding device 53 that supplies game balls onto the launch rail 52 and a solenoid 54 that is an electric actuator that launches the game balls supplied onto the launch rail 52 toward the guide rail are provided. By operating a firing handle 55 provided on the front door frame 14, the solenoid 54 is driven and controlled, and a game ball is launched.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 56 so that almost the entire gaming area can be viewed from the front. The window part 56 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 57 is fitted therein. The window panel 57 is colorless and transparent formed of glass, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed colorless and transparent of synthetic resin, and the game area is visually recognized through the window panel 57 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. If possible, it may be colored and transparent.

  Around the window portion 56, light emitting means such as various lamp portions are provided. A display lamp part 58 is provided above the window part 56 as a part of various lamp parts.

  Below the window portion 56 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 61 and a lower bulging portion 62 bulging toward the front side are arranged in parallel. An upper plate 61 a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 61, and a lower plate 62 a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 62. The upper plate 61a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 51 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 62a has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 61a.

  The pachinko machine 10 has an upper speaker unit 90 provided at the upper part of the pachinko machine 10 and a lower speaker unit 100 provided at the lower part. The speaker units 90 and 100 can output sounds such as production sounds and notification sounds (audible sounds including voice messages). The effect sound is a sound that can enhance the effect during the game, and examples of the effect sound include a melody according to the effect and a sound effect according to the game state. Examples of the notification sound include a guide sound that informs the player of the state of the pachinko machine 10, and a fraud occurrence sound that informs the hall manager of the occurrence of fraud.

  A plurality of upper speaker units 90 are provided on the upper portion of the front door frame 14. Specifically, one upper speaker unit 90 is provided at each corner near the upper side of the front door frame 14. Each upper speaker unit 90 includes an upper speaker 91 as sound output means for outputting sound when a sound signal is input, and a speaker cover 92 that covers the upper speaker 91 from the front side of the pachinko machine. The speaker cover 92 forms a part of the front surface of the front door frame 14, and each upper speaker 91 is disposed on the back side of the speaker cover 92. In this case, the right upper speaker 91 and the left upper speaker 91 are paired.

  A plurality of holes (not shown) penetrating in the thickness direction are formed in the speaker cover 92, and sound output from the upper speaker 91 is transmitted to the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the holes of the speaker cover 92. . Note that the speaker cover 92 may be configured to transmit sound even if the speaker cover 92 does not have a hole for transmitting sound.

  The lower speaker unit 100 is attached to the lower part of the outer frame 11. Here, the lower speaker unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 6 to 8. 6 is a perspective view of the outer frame 11, FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view of the periphery of the lower speaker unit 100.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the outer frame 11 is formed in a rectangular frame shape, and is configured by connecting long frame members arranged on four sides to each other. The outer frame 11 includes, as frame materials, a lower frame portion 11a and an upper frame portion 11d that are arranged vertically, and frame portions 11b and 11c that are arranged on the left and right. The lower frame portion 11a has a larger plate width than the left and right frame portions 11b and 11c, and extends forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the left and right frame portions 11b and 11c. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. The outer frame 11 is made of wood, a synthetic resin material, a metal material, or the like.

  The lower speaker unit 100 includes a lower speaker 101 as sound output means for outputting sound when a sound signal is input, a speaker housing 102 that supports the lower speaker 101, a lower speaker 101, and It has a curtain plate 103 that covers the speaker housing 102 from the front side of the pachinko machine, and the lower speaker 101, the speaker housing 102, and the curtain plate 103 are integrated into a speaker unit.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the lower end portion of the gaming machine main body 12 is spaced upward from the lower frame portion 11a of the outer frame 11, and a curtain plate 103 is provided at the spaced portion. The curtain plate 103 is formed in a thin plate shape with a colored opaque resin. Although not shown, the manufacturer name of the pachinko machine 10 is written on the front surface of the curtain plate 103. It should be noted that the model name of the pachinko machine 10 may be written on the front surface of the curtain plate 103, and these manufacturer name and model name may not be written.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, a speaker housing 102 is provided behind the curtain plate 103. The speaker housing 102 is disposed between the gaming machine main body 12 and the lower frame portion 11a, and extends in the width direction of the pachinko machine 10 along the lower frame portion 11a. The lower frame portion 11a is made of wood, and the speaker housing 102 is screwed to the lower frame portion 11a. The curtain plate 103 is screwed to the speaker housing 102.

  The speaker housing 102 is formed in a horizontally long box shape using a synthetic resin material or the like, and is placed on the lower frame portion 11a. The speaker housing 102 has a width dimension smaller than the separation distance between the left and right frame portions 11b and 11c, and is disposed between the frame portions 11b and 11c.

  One lower speaker 101 is provided for each of the left and right ends of the speaker housing 102. In this case, the lower speaker 101 is disposed on each of the left and right sides in the lower part of the pachinko machine 10, and the right lower speaker 101 and the left lower speaker 101 are paired.

  Each lower speaker 101 is configured to output sound from the front side, and is housed inside the speaker housing 102 with the front side facing the front of the pachinko machine 10. A speaker opening 105 is formed on the front surface of the speaker housing 102 so as to correspond to the mounting positions of the lower speakers 101, and the front surface of each lower speaker 101 is connected to the speaker through the speaker openings 105. It is exposed on the front side of the housing 102.

  The lower speaker 101 has a flange portion 106 that extends outward around the front surface (sound output portion). The flange portion 106 is fixed to the front surface portion with screws or the like in a state where the flange portion 106 is superimposed on the outer surface of the front surface portion of the speaker housing 102. In this case, the flange portion 106 is exposed on the front side of the speaker housing 102.

  The speaker housing 102 has a partition plate 107 that divides the internal space into two, and the lower speaker 101 is inserted into each space partitioned by the partition plate 107. The speaker housing 102 is a sealed enclosure. In the speaker housing 102, each space into which the lower speaker 101 is inserted is a sealed space.

  The curtain plate 103 is formed with a plurality of speaker holes 103a at positions facing the front surface of the lower speaker 101, so that the sound output from the lower speaker 101 is transmitted to the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the speaker hole 103a. It has become. Therefore, even if the curtain 103 covers the lower speaker 101 from the front side of the pachinko machine, the sound output from the lower speaker 101 is blocked by the curtain 103 and is difficult to hear. Can be suppressed.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main control device 71 for controlling the main game, and voice and lamp display and a display control device (not shown) are controlled. A sound light control device 72 is mounted.

  In addition, you may provide the trace structure for giving the trace means for leaving the trace of the opening | release to the board | substrate box 71a of the main control apparatus 71, or leaving the trace of the open | release. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 71a are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer is bonded when peeled off A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise the board | substrate box 71a can be considered. In addition, you may provide such a trace structure in the board | substrate box of the payout control apparatus 78 mentioned later.

  The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 71 and the sound and light control device 72. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 73 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and a payout mechanism 74 and a control device assembly unit 75 are attached to the back pack 73.

  The payout mechanism unit 74 includes a tank 76 in which game balls supplied from island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 77 for paying out game balls stored in the tank 76. The game balls paid out from the payout device 77 are discharged to the upper plate 61a or the lower plate 62a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 77. The payout mechanism 74 is provided with a back pack substrate having a power switch for turning on and off the power supply, for example, while supplying a main power of AC 24 volts.

  The control device assembly unit 75 generates and outputs a predetermined power required by a payout control device 78 having a function of controlling the payout device 77 and various control devices and the like, and a game associated with the operation of the launch handle 55 by the player A power supply and launch control device 79 for controlling the launch of the ball. The payout control device 78 and the power supply / launch control device 79 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 78 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The back pack 73 is provided with an external terminal plate 81 in addition to the payout mechanism 74 and the control device assembly unit 75. The external terminal plate 81 is installed at the upper corner of the back pack unit 15 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and on the upper corner. The external terminal board 81 is a board for outputting a predetermined signal so that the management computer of the game hall recognizes the state of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the back side of the gaming machine main body 12, a volume switch 111 for adjusting the volume (volume) of the sound output from the speakers 91 and 101 is provided. Here, the volume switch 111 will be described with reference to FIG. 1, FIG. 9, and FIG. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the inner frame 13. FIG. 9 is also a view of the rear side of the inner frame 13 with the back pack unit 15 mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the volume switch 111 is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the sound light control device 72 and is an operation means that can be operated by a person from the back side of the gaming machine main body 12. The volume switch 111 is a dial-type switch (rotary switch), and can be switched to one of a plurality of states (positions) by being rotated by a person. On the surface of the sound light control device 72, a plurality of scales indicating which of the plurality of positions the volume switch 111 is displayed.

  For example, the volume switch 111 can be switched to, for example, one of seven positions, and seven scales (0 to 5, F) indicating each position are displayed. The volume switch 111 is provided with a mark indicating the position. By matching the mark of the volume switch 111 to any one of a plurality of scales, the volume output from the speakers 91 and 101 is set to a magnitude corresponding to the scale. Become.

  Note that the volume switch 111 may be a slide-type switch, a dip switch, or the like as long as it is a switch that can be switched to any of a plurality of positions. Further, the volume switch 111 may be a switch that does not have a plurality of positions and can continuously change its own state.

  In addition to the volume switch 111, an operation knob 112 for variably setting a reference level of a sound crack detection circuit 175 (see FIG. 24) described later is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the sound light control device 72. The operation knob 112 is a dial switch similar to the volume switch 111, and the reference level is changed by rotating the operation knob 112. In this case, the reference level is set according to the operation state of the operation knob 112. The operation knob 112 can set the reference level steplessly. The reference level is gradually increased by turning to one of the clockwise and counterclockwise rotations, and the reference level is set by turning to the other. Decrease gradually. Note that the operation knob 112 may be a slide switch, a dip switch, or the like, similar to the volume switch 111.

  The operation knob 112 is provided individually for each of the speakers 91 and 101, and a plurality (for example, four) of the operation knobs 112 are arranged side by side on the outer peripheral surface of the sound and light control device 72. The installation positions of the operation knobs 112 correspond to the installation positions of the speakers 91 and 101. For example, when the inner frame 13 is viewed from the back side, the operation knob 112 arranged at the upper left of the four operation knobs 112 is the left side of the two upper speakers 91 (the right side when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front). The operation knob 112 disposed at the lower left is connected to the lower speaker 101 on the right side (left side when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front) of the two lower speakers 101. It corresponds.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the sound light control device 72 is covered with a back pack 73 from the back side of the pachinko machine, and the back pack 73 has a switch opening for exposing the volume switch 111 to the back side of the pachinko machine. 113 is formed. The switch opening 113 is disposed in a portion of the back pack 73 that covers the volume switch 111, and a switch lid 114 that can be opened and closed is attached to the switch opening 113. The switch lid 114 is pivotally supported with respect to the back pack 73, and opens the switch opening 113 by being rotated toward the back side of the pachinko machine. When the switch lid 114 is opened, the volume switch 111 can be operated with the back pack unit 15 mounted on the inner frame 13.

  The switch opening 113 does not open to the portion of the back pack 73 that covers the operation knob 112. In addition, once the reference level is set, the operation knob 112 is operated less frequently, and the operation knob 112 is arranged at a position that does not overlap the switch opening 113, so that the operation knob 112 is erroneously operated. Can be suppressed.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  The main control device 71 includes a main control board 121 that manages the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board (power interruption monitoring board) 125 that monitors the power supply. A main MPU 122 is mounted on the main control board 121. The main MPU 122 includes a ROM 123 and an RWM 124 in addition to a CPU that is a central processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit.

  The ROM 123 is configured to use, as a read-only memory, a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory. The ROM 123 stores various control programs executed by the main MPU 122 and fixed value data.

  The RWM 124 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing. The time required for reading is faster than that of the ROM 123 when compared with the data capacity. The RWM 124 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 123.

  The main MPU 122 or the main control board 121 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 123 and the RWM 124 are made into one chip with respect to the main MPU 122, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The main MPU 122 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the main MPU 122, a power failure monitoring board 125, a payout control device 78, various winning detection sensors 126a to 126h, and the like are connected. A power supply and launch control device 79 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 125, and power is supplied to the main MPU 122 via the power failure monitoring board 125.

  Further, the various winning detection sensors 126a to 126h are provided one-to-one with respect to the winning-corresponding winning portions such as the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, and the through gate 35. The main MPU 122 makes a winning determination (speech determination) for each winning portion based on the detection results of the various winning detection sensors 126a to 126h. In addition, the main MPU 122 executes a lottery lottery based on a winning at the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 and also executes a support lottery based on a winning at the through gate 35.

  Further, a magnet detection sensor 47a and a radio wave detection sensor 47b are electrically connected to the input side of the main MPU 122 via electric wiring. The main MPU 122 receives signals from the magnet detection sensor 47a and the radio wave detection sensor 47b, and based on the reception result, it is determined whether or not an abnormality that is a detection target has occurred.

  On the output side of the main MPU 122, a power failure monitoring board 125, a payout control device 78, and a sound light control device 72 are connected. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 78 based on the winning determination result for the above-mentioned winning part. The sound light control device 72 outputs various commands such as a change command, a type command, a final stop command, an opening command, and an ending command.

  Further, on the output side of the main MPU 122, a variable prize driving unit 32b for opening / closing the opening / closing door 32a of the variable prize winning device 32, an electric combination driving unit 34b for opening / closing the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, a main display. The unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are connected. The main control board 121 is provided with various driver circuits, and the main MPU 122 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Although not shown in the figure, the main MPU 122 also performs light emission control of the first reserved light emitting unit 45 and the second reserved light emitting unit 46.

  The power failure monitoring board 125 relays between the main control board 121 and the power supply and launch control device 79, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 79. The payout control device 78 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 77 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 71.

  The power source and launch control device 79 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 121 and the payout controller 78 and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. The power supply and launch control device 79 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 51, and drives the game ball launch mechanism 51 based on specifying a predetermined launch operation on the launch handle 55.

  The payout control device 78 is electrically connected to a full detection sensor 131 that detects whether the lower plate 62a as a ball receiving tray is full of game balls, and the tank 76 is in a ball-free state. A ballless detection sensor 132 for detecting whether or not there is an electrical connection. The full detection sensor 131 is provided in a passage for discharging the game ball to the lower tray 62a, and the tank ball absence detection sensor 132 is provided in a passage for supplying the game ball from the tank 76 to the payout device 77. ing. The full detection sensor 131 and the tank ball absence detection sensor 132 output detection signals to the payout control device 78.

  A display lamp unit 58 and a display control device 128 are connected to the sound light control device 72, and the sound light control device 72 is provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 71. The display lamp unit 58 is driven and controlled, and the display control device 128 is controlled. The display control device 128 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command input from the sound light control device 72.

  The sound light control device 72 is connected to a volume switch 111, an operation knob 112, an upper speaker 91, and a lower speaker 101. The volume switch 111 outputs a detection signal corresponding to its own position (the scale on which the mark of the volume switch 111 is aligned) to the sound light control device 72, and the sound light control device 72 is based on the detection signal. The position of the volume switch 111 is determined. Further, in the sound light control device 72, the reference level of the sound crack detection circuit 175 is set according to the operation state of the operation knob 112.

  The sound light control device 72 outputs a sound signal corresponding to the position of the volume switch 111 to the speakers 91 and 101, and the sound signals from the sound light control device 72 are input to the speakers 91 and 101. Thus, a sound having a magnitude corresponding to the volume level of the sound signal is output. Each upper speaker 91 and each lower speaker 101 are individually connected to the sound light control device 72 via a speaker path 135. The speaker path 135 is formed by electric wiring or the like.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 122>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 122 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the game, the main MPU 122 uses various counter information to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of display of the main display unit 43, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the accessory display unit 44, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 fluctuate. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of jackpot random number counter C1, and variation type for determining display continuation time in main display unit 43 and symbol display device 41 The counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in the electric utility open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 137a of the RWM 124.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in a holding storage area 137b as an acquisition information storage means when a winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 occurs. Is done.

  The holding storage area 137b includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and matches the winning history to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2 → third reserved area RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 are stored on hold.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display on the main display unit 43, and at the start of one game round. Based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, determination of whether or not is made is performed.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 137b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (award / failure information group) in a success / failure table storage area as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 123. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode (low probability success / failure information group) and a high probability mode's success / failure table (high probability success / failure information group) are set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 137b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are (1) a mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the operating port 34.

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to increase the occurrence frequency of winning in the variable prize winning device 32 between the start and end of the opening / closing execution mode relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in any of the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the game is executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit.

  Here, the round game means that a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses or that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins a big winning opening of the variable winning device 32. A game that continues until one of these conditions is met. In addition, the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same for a fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds (15R) regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of opening modes of the variable winning device 32 are set with different opening durations (opening durations) from when the big winning opening is opened until it is closed. ing. Specifically, a long-time mode (long-term mode) set to 29 seconds, which is a long open duration, and a short time set to 0.06 sec, which is a short time shorter than the above-mentioned long time, A mode (short-term mode) is set.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 55 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 51 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 sec. . In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open duration time is set longer than the product of the game ball firing period and one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, an opening continuation time is set that is shorter than the product of the game ball launch cycle and one round game, more specifically, shorter than the game ball launch cycle. Therefore, when the variable winning device 32 is opened once in a long-time manner, it is expected that the maximum number of winnings in one round game will be generated at the big winning opening. When the variable winning device 32 is opened once in the time mode, it is expected that no winning in the big winning opening occurs or even if a winning occurs.

  In the high-frequency winning mode, the big winning opening is opened once in a round manner in each round game. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the large winning opening is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

  In addition, the number of times of opening / closing the big prize opening in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are higher in the high frequency winning mode. If the occurrence frequency of winning in the variable winning device 32 is higher than that in the low-frequency winning mode until the opening / closing execution mode starts and ends, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. is there.

  As a support mode for the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34 is compared when the game ball is continuously being fired in the same manner with respect to the game area. High frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) and low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) so that the frequency of the open state per unit time is relatively high or low. And are set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5) However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electrified open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one more release is performed. The time is set longer. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closure from the end of one open state until the start of the next open state is performed. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, a shorter time is secured as a minimum secured time after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character object opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Is set to be selected.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning a prize for the lower working port 34 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be given to the upper working port 33 than to the lower working port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower working port 34 is connected to the lower working port 34. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning is made to the lower working port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming electrified in the electric character open state in In addition, a secured time (e.g., on the display part 44 for an accessory based on a winning to the through gate 35) that is secured after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character releasing lottery is performed once. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the short support time is more easily selected in the high frequency support mode or the average secure time is shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be. Further, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the secured time that is secured when the next electric winning combination opening lottery is performed after the first electric winning combination releasing lottery is shortened (that is, , Shorten the one time variable display time in the display 44 for an accessory), shorten the average time of the reserved time and increase the winning probability, apply any one condition or any combination of conditions Thus, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 123. Then, as such distribution destinations, a low-probability jackpot result (low-probability-specific special game result), a low-winning high-probability jackpot result (explicit high-probability-corresponding game result or a result that becomes suddenly probable), High-probability special game result) is set.

  The low probability big hit result is a big hit result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

  The low-winning high-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. is there. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that.

  The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / raising lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that.

  It should be noted that the normal gaming state in relation to the above gaming states is not the open / close execution mode (special gaming state), but also the state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. . Moreover, it is good also as a structure in which the low prize-winning high probability hit result is not set as a game result.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low probability big hit result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the low winning high probability big hit result. “15 to 29” corresponds to the most favorable jackpot result.

  As a kind of high-accuracy big hit result, the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. An implicit low winning high probability jackpot result (a game result corresponding to an implicit high probability or a result of a latent probability changing state) may be included. In this case, the jackpot result can be further diversified.

  Furthermore, as a kind of losing result in the winning / losing lottery, there may be included a special losing result that shifts to the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode and that does not shift to the winning / losing lottery mode and the support mode after the completion. . In the configuration in which both the above-mentioned non-explicit low winning high probability winning result and the special outlier result are set, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the low frequency winning mode, and the support mode is changed to the previous mode. It is common to be maintained in the mode, but the transition mode of the winning / failing lottery mode is different, so that, for example, in the normal gaming state, one of the unclear low winning high probability winning result or the special outage result When it occurs, it is possible to make the player predict which result it actually corresponds to.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 137b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, reach display is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The reach display includes a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (patterns), and variable display in game times in which the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 32 is the high-frequency winning mode. In the gaming machine in which the subsequent stop display result is a special display result, the stage before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) in the symbol display device 41 is started, This means a display state for making the player think that a variable display state is likely to result in a special display result.

  In the reach display, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is obtained by stopping and displaying symbols for some of the symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A display state is displayed in which combinations of reach symbols that may be established are displayed, and in that state, symbols in the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol columns, and a reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode. In the game times that do not shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing is referred to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 123 in response to the occurrence of the reach display. It is executed when

  The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main MPU 122 determines the variation display time (display duration) on the main display unit 43 and the symbol variation display time (display duration) on the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated in each of a main process and a timer interrupt process, which will be described later. The variation type counter CS is used for determining a variation pattern at the start of variation display in the main display unit 43 and at the time of variation variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. The value of CS is acquired. In determining the variable display time, the variable display time table (variable display time information group) stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area (variable display time information storage means) of the ROM 123 is referred to.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in an electric accessory reservation area 137c provided in the RWM 124 at a timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state based on the value of the stored electric accessory release counter C4.

<Various types of processing executed by the main MPU 122>
Next, each process performed in order to advance a game in main MPU122 is demonstrated. The processing of the main MPU 122 is roughly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on and timer interrupt processing that is periodically started.

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is activated. In the subsequent step S102, access to the RWM 124 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the main MPU 122 is set.

  Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RWM deletion switch provided in the power supply and launch control device 79 is manually operated. In subsequent step S105, whether or not the power failure flag of the RWM 124 is set to “1” is determined. Determine whether. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed. In subsequent step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is checked. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the RWM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the game hall is started, the power is turned on while the RWM erase switch is pressed. Therefore, if the RWM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the RWM 124 is cleared as initialization of the RWM 124. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, if the RWM erase switch has not been pressed, “1” is set in the power failure flag and the checksum is normal, and the process of step S109 is not executed without executing the process of step S108. Proceed to In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RWM 124 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the sound control device 72 in order to recognize the current gaming state. To do. Also, a payout initialization command indicating that the RWM initialization of the payout control device 78 should be executed is transmitted to the payout control device 78. Furthermore, an interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of timer interrupt processing.

  Then, it progresses to the residual process of step S110-step S113. That is, the main MPU 122 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S110, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In the subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and a fluctuation counter update process for updating the fluctuation type counter is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the RWM 124, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is performed. If the process of step S113 is performed, it will return to step S110 and will repeat the process of step S110-step S113.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 122 will be described. The main control board 121 is provided with a clock circuit as pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and further divided so as to exist in the middle of the signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 122. A circuit is provided.

  The frequency dividing circuit functions as frequency changing means for changing the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the main MPU 122. In other words, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 122 at intervals of a 4 msec period which is a specific period. The main MPU 122 executes a process for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as the rise or fall of the pulse signal, and activates the timer interrupt process with at least one condition confirming the occurrence of the specific signal form. Run.

  In this case, when the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed in the situation where the start of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed when the interrupt is permitted from the state where the interrupt is prohibited. Interrupt processing is started. That is, depending on the execution status of the process in the main MPU 122, the next timer interrupt process may start after 4.1 msec from the start of the previous timer interrupt process. This timer interrupt process is started after 3.9 msec from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt process.

  However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific cycle of 4 msec regardless of the progress of processing in the main MPU 122, the timer interrupt processing is basically started at a specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 122 is such that the timer interrupt process at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific period since the previous timer interrupt process was started. The timer interrupt process at the timing absorbs the part exceeding the specific period, and the timer interrupt process at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power outage monitoring board 125, and when the occurrence of a power outage is specified, the process during power outage is executed.

  In subsequent step S202, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing the process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information Then, a process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value.

  Thereafter, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112. In a succeeding step S205, a game stop determination process is executed. In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped. If the progress of the game is to be stopped, the execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped.

  Thereafter, in step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped, and the processing after step S207 is executed on the condition that the progress of the game is not stopped.

  In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information for switching the large winning opening of the variable winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 32b is started and the information to be switched to the closed state is set. If so, output of the drive signal is stopped. When the information for switching the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 34b is started, and the information to be switched to the closed state is set. If so, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In a succeeding step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  In subsequent step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, signals received from the winning detection sensors 126a to 126h are read, and the general winning port 31, the large winning port of the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are displayed. A process for specifying whether or not a prize has been won is executed.

  In the subsequent step S210, timer update processing for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RWM 124 is executed. In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  In subsequent step S211, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the game stop setting is made in step S205 in the next timer interrupt process, An affirmative determination is made in step S206.

  In the subsequent step S212, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In a situation where the launch operation is continued for the launch handle 55, as described above, one game ball is launched at a predetermined launch period of 0.6 sec.

  In the subsequent step S213, as the input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process in step S208, the disconnection confirmation of the winning detection sensors 126a to 126h and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are confirmed. Do.

  In the subsequent step S214, special figure special electric control processing for performing execution control of game times and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the special figure special electric power control process, when a winning to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 occurs in a situation where the number of the holding information stored in the holding storage area 137b is less than the upper limit number, A process of storing the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in the hold storage area 137b in time series is executed. Also, in the special figure special electric control process, whether or not the hold information corresponds to the big win is determined on the condition that the hold information is not stored during the game rotation and the opening / closing execution mode and is stored. If it corresponds to the process and the jackpot winning, a distribution determination process for determining which jackpot result the hold information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special power control process, not only the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process, but if the hold information does not correspond to the big win, whether the hold information corresponds to the occurrence of reach. A reach determination process is performed, and a duration selection process for selecting the duration of the game times using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is executed. Then, the variation command including the duration information corresponding to the result of each processing and the type command including the game result information are transmitted to the sound control device 72, and the pattern variation in the main display unit 43 is also transmitted. Start display. As a result, one game is started, and an effect for the game is started on the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41.

  Also, in the special figure special electric control process, during the execution of one game round, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the game round. If it is the end timing, the display corresponding to the game result is performed. Then, the process of ending the game round is executed. In this case, a final stop command (or a confirmation command) indicating that the game round should be ended is transmitted to the sound control device 72. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the result of the game times is a result corresponding to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, a process for starting the opening / closing execution mode is executed. At the start, an opening command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound control device 72. In the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that a round game is started (or that the variable winning device 32 is in an open state) is transmitted to the sound control device 72 and the round game is ended (or variable). A closing command indicating that the winning device 32 is in a closed state) is transmitted to the sound control device 72. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the opening / closing execution mode is ended, an ending command indicating that is sent to the sound control device 72, and the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode are set. Execute the process.

  After executing the special figure special power control process of step S214 in the timer interruption process, the normal figure normal power control process is executed in step S215. In the ordinary map / electric power control process, when a winning to the through gate 35 is generated, a process for acquiring the retained information on the ordinary map side is executed and the retained information on the ordinary map side is stored. In addition, a release determination is performed on the hold information, and a process for performing an effect for a normal diagram is executed using the release determination as a trigger. Moreover, the process which opens and closes the electrically-driven accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 based on the result of opening determination is performed.

  In subsequent step S216, based on the processing results of immediately preceding step S214 and step S215, setting of output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the main display unit 43 in the first hold light emitting unit 45, and The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the accessory display unit 44 to the second hold light emitting unit 46 is set. In step S216, the output information for updating the display content of the main display unit 43 is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 and S215, and the display content of the accessory display unit 44 is set. Set the output information to be updated.

  In the subsequent step S217, a demonstration display process is performed to make the display content of the symbol display device 41 for standby display in a situation where neither the game times nor the opening / closing execution mode is executed, and in step S218, Then, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 78 are confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S219, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed.

  In subsequent step S220, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal in accordance with the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed. In step S221, a process for editing the test fire test information is executed.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after the processing of steps S207 to S221 is executed, the process proceeds to step S222. In step S222, an interrupt end declaration is set. In the main MPU 122, once timer interrupt processing is started, it is stipulated that an interrupt end declaration is set as one of the conditions for starting the next timer interrupt processing. Set the interrupt end declaration to enable execution of timer interrupt processing. In step S223, interrupt permission is set. In the main MPU 122, once the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is disabled. Therefore, in step S223, interrupt permission is set to enable execution of the next timer interrupt processing. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Injustice detection processing>
Next, the fraud detection process executed in step S211 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the fraud detection process, whether or not a plurality of types of detection target frauds that are determined in advance has occurred is monitored, and if it is determined that fraud has occurred, a process for dealing with the fraud is executed. As an illegal act of such a plurality of types of detection targets, an act of illegally generating a winning game ball using a magnet, and an erroneous detection of a winning game ball by the large winning opening detection sensor of the variable winning device 32 This includes acts and attempts to illegally generate game ball winnings using radio waves.

  In the fraud detection process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 15, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the magnet detection sensor 47a is ON. Specifically, the magnet detection sensor 47a outputs a LOW level magnet detection signal corresponding to non-detection when the generation of magnetism by the magnet is not detected, and also detects the generation of magnetism by the magnet. In this case, a magnet detection signal of HI level corresponding to the detection is output. Note that the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. The magnet detection signal is input to the input port of the main MPU 122 when the driver sets the signal as an input target to the main MPU 122. In step S301, the input port is monitored to determine whether or not the magnet detection sensor 47a is detecting the occurrence of magnetism.

  If a negative determination is made in step S301, the magnet detection counter provided in the RWM 124 is cleared to “0” in step S302. The magnet detection counter is a counter for specifying in the main MPU 122 the number of times that the magnet detection sensor 47a has confirmed that the generation of magnetism is being detected.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S301, a process for adding 1 to the magnet detection counter is executed in step S303, and the numerical information after the addition is “2” in step S304. It is determined whether or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the main MPU 122 has confirmed that the magnet detection sensor 47a is detecting the occurrence of magnetism a plurality of times.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S304, a magnet detected state is set by setting “1” in the magnet detected flag of the RWM 124 in step S305. In subsequent step S306, the magnet detection command is set as an output target. The magnet detection command is a command for causing the sound light control device 72, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that the main MPU 122 has identified the occurrence of an illegal act using a magnet. Note that the command set as an output target in the main MPU 122 is transmitted to the output destination control device without executing any special processing in the processing on the program of the main MPU 122.

  In step S307, an abnormal external output start process is executed in order for the gaming hall management computer to recognize that the occurrence of an illegal act using a magnet has been specified. The output setting for the external terminal board 81 is executed in the external information setting process (step S220) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). The same applies to the processing relating to the following external output.

  After execution of step S302, if a negative determination is made in step S304, or after execution of step S307, the process proceeds to step S308. In step S308, it is determined whether or not a winning for the variable winning device 32 has occurred by determining whether or not the large winning flag of the RWM 124 is set to “1”. If a winning to the variable winning device 32 has occurred, it is determined in step S309 whether or not the special figure special electricity counter provided in the RWM 124 is "4". The contents of the special figure special electricity counter will be described in detail later. When the counter is “4”, it means that the open / close door 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is being opened.

  When the special figure special electricity counter is not “4”, that is, when the open / close door 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is closed, the variable prize winning device 32 receives a big prize even though the open / close door 32a is closed. This means that a game ball is detected by the mouth detection sensor. In this case, the process proceeds to step S310, and the illegal winning state is set by setting “1” to the illegal winning flag of the RWM 124. In the following step S311, an illegal winning command is set as an output target. The unauthorized prize command is a command for causing the sound light control device 72, which is the control device on the sub side, to recognize that an illegal act that erroneously detects the winning in the big prize opening detection sensor of the variable prize winning device 32 has occurred.

  In step S312, an abnormal external output start process is executed in order to cause the management computer of the gaming hall to recognize that the occurrence of the illegal act to be illegally won is specified. In step S309, a time required for detection of the game ball elapses from the closing timing in consideration of a case where a game ball win occurs just before the opening / closing door 32a of the variable winning device 32 that is normally opened is closed. It is good also as a structure which does not carry out a negative determination until.

  If a negative determination is made in step S308, an affirmative determination is made in step S309, or after execution of step S312, the radio wave detection process is executed in step S313, and then this fraud detection process is terminated.

  Here, the radio wave detection process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the radio wave detection process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the radio wave detection sensor 47b is ON. Specifically, the radio wave detection sensor 47b outputs a LOW level radio wave detection signal corresponding to non-detection when no radio wave is detected, and HI corresponding to the detection when radio wave is detected. A level radio wave detection signal is output. Note that the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. The radio wave detection signal is input to the input port of the main MPU 122 when the driver sets the signal as an input target to the main MPU 122. In step S401, the input port is monitored to determine whether or not the radio wave detection sensor 47b is detecting radio waves. If an affirmative determination is made in step S401, the process proceeds to step S402.

  In step S402, it is determined whether or not the radio wave detection command has been set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the radio wave detection command set flag provided in the RWM 124. If a negative determination is made in step S402, the process proceeds to step S403.

  In step S403, it is determined whether or not radio wave detection has been completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the radio wave detected flag provided in the RWM 124. If a negative determination is made in step S403, the process proceeds to step S404 and 1 is added to the radio wave detected counter provided in the RWM 124.

  In a succeeding step S405, it is determined whether or not the value of the radio wave detected counter is “2”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S405, the process proceeds to step S406 and the radio wave detection completed state is set. Specifically, “1” is set to the radio wave detected flag.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S403 or after execution of step S406, it is determined in step S407 whether or not the capacity of the transmission data storage unit mounted on the main control board 121 is empty. If an affirmative determination is made in step S407, the radio wave detection command is stored in the transmission data storage unit in the subsequent step S408 and set as an output target.

  The radio wave detection command is a command for causing the sound light control device 72, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that the main MPU 122 has identified the radio wave detection state. The sound light control device 72 sets a sound emission pattern for radio wave detection when a radio wave detection command is received. Specifically, the radio wave detection command consists of 2-byte information. It has a radio wave detection command, upper information and lower information, and each piece of information is composed of 1 byte. Information for identifying fraud detection commands is set in the upper information, and information for specifically detecting fraud using radio waves is set in the lower information. The radio wave detection command is set as an output target by being stored in the transmission data storage unit.

  In the subsequent step S409, the radio wave detected flag is cleared. In the subsequent step S410, the value of the radio wave detected counter is cleared, and in the subsequent step S411, the radio wave detection command is set to the set state. Specifically, “1” is set to the radio wave detection command set flag.

  In subsequent step S412, an abnormal external output start process is executed in order for the gaming hall management computer to recognize that the occurrence of an illegal act using radio waves has been identified. The output setting for the external terminal board 81 is executed in the external information setting process in step S220 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  When a negative determination is made in step S407 or after execution of step S412, the fraud detection process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S401, the radio wave detection command set flag is cleared in step S413. If an affirmative determination is made in step S402, a negative determination is made in step S405, or after execution of step S413, the fraud detection process is terminated.

<Game stop determination process>
Next, the game stop determination process executed in step S205 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the game stop determination process, it is determined whether or not a magnet has been detected in step S501, whether or not it is an illegal winning state in step S502, and whether or not a radio wave is detected in step S503. Determine whether or not. And when negative determination is carried out in all of step S501-step S503, this game stop determination process is complete | finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S501 to S503, the process proceeds to step S504. In step S504, processing for setting all output states at the output ports of the main MPU 122 to “0” is executed. Thereby, for example, even when the open / close door 32a of the variable prize apparatus 32 is in an open state, the output of the drive signal to the variable prize drive unit 32b is stopped, so that the open / close door 32a of the variable prize apparatus 32 is closed. Switch to state. Even when the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in the open state, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 34b is stopped, so that the electric accessory 34a is switched to the closed state. . Even when the HI level launch permission signal is output from the main MPU 122 to the power source and launch control device 79, it is switched to the LOW level launch permission signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. The

  In the subsequent step S505, the game stop state is set by setting “1” to the game stop flag provided in the RWM 124. In subsequent step S506, other release processing is executed. For example, a game stop command is output to the payout control device 78, thereby stopping the payout of game balls by the payout device 77. In addition, a game stop command is output to the sound light control device 72, thereby stopping the display of the variation of the pattern on the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44. Thereafter, the game stop determination process ends.

  By setting the game stop state in the game stop determination process as described above, an affirmative determination is made in step S206 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). If an affirmative determination is made in step S206, the processing in steps S207 to S221 is skipped. The processes in steps S207 to S221 are processes for substantially progressing the game, and the progress of the game can be stopped by skipping such processes.

  However, even in the game stop state, the power failure information storage process in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is not skipped. Thereby, even if a power failure occurs during the game stop state, it is possible to normally execute the power failure process. Assuming a configuration in which processing during a power failure is not normally executed while the game is stopped, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off when the game is stopped, the power failure flag is set and the checksum is calculated correctly. When the main process is activated, the RWM 124 is initialized when the main process is not performed. If it does so, a game stop state will be cancelled | released through the simple power interruption of the pachinko machine 10. In such a case, for example, if the act of shutting off the power of the pachinko machine 10 is performed after illegally generating a payout of the game ball, it becomes difficult to detect the fraud and the pachinko machine 10 is normally thereafter It becomes possible to repeat such cheating due to the operation. On the other hand, even if the game is stopped, the power failure process is normally executed. Therefore, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off after performing the above fraudulent action, the game is stopped after the power is restored. It will return to a state and it will become possible to prevent generation | occurrence | production of the above inconveniences.

  As described above, the game stop state is not canceled even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. However, the main process (by manually operating the RWM erase switch provided in the power source and launch control device 79 and shutting off the power) The game stop flag is cleared to “0” and released through the process of step S108 in FIG. At this time, the state of performing external output regarding fraud detection is also released. In this case, since the power supply and launch control device 79 is provided on the backmost surface of the pachinko machine 10, it is difficult for an unauthorized person to manually operate the RWM erase switch. Incidentally, in order to make the operability more difficult, a configuration may be adopted in which an RWM erasure switch is provided at a position covered from the back side by the back pack 73 or another member.

  Incidentally, even in the game stop state, the process of updating various lottery counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is continued without being skipped. Thereby, even if it is in a game stop state, the update of the counters C1-C4 for various lotteries, CINI, and CS can be continued. In this configuration, even if the RWM erase switch is operated and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the various counters C1 to C4, CINI and CS are not initialized, and the game stop state is canceled. In this case, it is more effective when applied to a configuration in which the initialization of the RWM 124 is not essential.

  As described above, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of fraudulent acts subject to game suspension are set, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), in the process of identifying the occurrence of each fraud, the presence or absence of such fraudulent acts is identified. In particular, the specific game stop process is executed at a timing before the process for substantially advancing the game in the timer interrupt process. This makes it possible to consolidate the game stop processing into one process compared to the case of immediately executing the game stop processing when the occurrence of each fraud is identified, and simplification of the processing. Figured.

  Further, even when the occurrence of the illegal act is specified, the game stop process is not immediately executed. When the occurrence of the illegal action is specified, the notification is immediately executed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can detect an illegal act at an early stage. In addition, because the abnormal external output is also performed immediately when the occurrence of fraud is specified, for example, if the external output is performed as management data stored in the management computer of the game hall, The administrator of the game hall can grasp the time at the moment when the occurrence of the illegal act is specified.

<Special Figure Special Electric Control Process>
Next, the special figure special power control process executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the special figure special electric control process, when a winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 is generated, a process for acquiring the holding information is executed and when the holding information is stored, the holding is performed. A determination is made as to whether or not the information is correct, and further, a process for performing an effect for game times is executed using the determination as to whether or not the information is correct. In addition, based on the result of the determination, the processing for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode after the effect for playing the game is executed, and the processing during the opening / closing execution mode and at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, first, hold information acquisition processing is executed in step S601. In the holding information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not a prize is generated in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. If a winning is generated, the number of holds in the holding storage area 137b is an upper limit value ( In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is less than “4”). When the number of holds is less than the upper limit, the number of holds is incremented by 1 and the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S202 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). Are stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserved area RE.

  In addition, when winning to the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 occurs at the same time, the process for obtaining the hold information is performed a plurality of times within a range in which the hold information obtaining process is executed once. Run.

  After executing the hold information acquisition process in step S601, the process proceeds to steps S602 and S603. In step S602 and step S603, a confirmation process for holding advance notice and a holding process, which is a process for causing the sound light control device 72 and the display control device 128 to recognize that a winning in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 has occurred. Execute command setting processing.

  The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S603 is transmitted to the sound control device 72. A detailed description of each process in steps S602 and S603 will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S604, a process for reading the information of the special figure special electricity counter provided in the RWM 124 is executed, and in a step S605, a process for reading the special figure special electric address table from the ROM 123 is executed. In step S606, a process of acquiring a start address corresponding to information on the special figure special power counter from the special figure special electric address table is executed.

  Here, the processing content of step S604-step S606 is demonstrated.

  As already described, the special figure special power control process includes a process related to a game-playing effect and a process related to an opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as processing related to the effect for game times, special figure variation start processing (step S608) that is processing for starting the effect for game times and processing for advancing the effect for game times. A special figure changing process (step S609) and a special figure finalizing process (step S610) that is a process for ending the effect for the game round are set.

  In addition, as a process related to the opening / closing execution mode, a special electricity start process (step S611) that is a process for controlling the opening of the opening / closing execution mode, and a state in which the special winning opening of the variable winning device 32 is being opened is controlled. Special power open process (step S612), which is a process, special power close process (step S613) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special prize opening, opening / closing execution mode ending and opening / closing execution mode end Special electric power termination processing (step S614), which is processing for controlling the transition of the gaming state of, is set.

  In such a processing configuration, the special figure special power counter is a counter for the main MPU 122 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plural types of processing should be executed. Corresponding to the numerical information of the special electric counter of the figure, the start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plural types of processing is set.

  In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure change start process (step S608), and the start address SA1 is the program for executing the special figure change process (step S609). The start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure finalizing process (step S610), and the start address SA3 is the program address for executing the special electricity start process (step S611). The start address SA4 is a start address of a program for executing the special power open process (step S612), and the start address SA5 is a program for executing the special power close process (step S613). This is the start address, and the start address SA6 A start address of a program for executing (step S614).

  The special figure special electric power counter is the special figure special electric power control in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. Corresponding to the processing executed in the processing, 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared (initialized). Therefore, in the special figure special power control process at each processing time, a process corresponding to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric power counter may be executed.

  After executing the process of step S606, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S606 is executed in step S607. Specifically, if the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure change start process in step S608.

  In the special figure variation start process, on the condition that the hold information is stored on hold, a process for shifting the hold information to the execution area AE of the hold storage area 137b is executed, and the data of each hold area RE1 to RE4 is also transferred. A process of shifting to the upper side (that is, the first reservation area RE1 side) is executed. After that, with respect to the hold information shifted to the execution area AE, whether or not to determine whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot winning, and if it corresponds to the jackpot winning, the hold information corresponds to any jackpot result A distribution determination process is performed to determine whether or not it is in progress. In the determination process, whether or not the numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 in the hold information is numerical information corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined. In the distribution determination process, it is determined whether the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 in the hold information corresponds to which jackpot result category.

  In addition to the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process, when the hold information does not correspond to the big win, the reach determination process is performed to determine whether or not the hold information corresponds to the occurrence of reach. Then, the duration selection process for selecting the duration of the game times is executed using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time. In the reach determination process, it is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information corresponds to the numerical information on the occurrence of reach.

  When the duration information is selected, the variation command including the duration information and the type command including the game result information are transmitted to the sound control device 72 and the pattern variation in the main display unit 43 is transmitted. Start display. As a result, one game is started, and an effect for the game is started on the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41.

  By the way, when the effect for the game round is started in this way, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 so that the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special figure variation start process. Update to the one corresponding to the changing process.

  If the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure changing process of step S609. In the special figure changing process, a process of determining whether or not it is during the game time duration and before the fixed display is performed, and before the fixed display, the display mode of the picture on the main display unit 43 A process for regularly changing is executed.

  By the way, instead of waiting in the special figure changing process until it is the timing to display the fixed figure, if it is not the timing to make a fixed display, the process for changing the regular figure is executed and then the special figure is changing. The process ends. Therefore, after the game-turn effect is started, the special-figure changing process is started every time the special-figure special-electric control process is started until the timing for final display is reached. In addition, when it is time to confirm and display, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special figure finalizing process from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process Update to what you did.

  If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure determining process in step S610. In the special figure determination process, the final stop command is transmitted to the sound control device 72 in order to cause the symbol display device 41 to display the stop result of the current game round as a final stop display. The mode is a display mode corresponding to the result of the current game round. In the special figure confirmation process, it is determined whether or not the period during confirmation display has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs. When the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the mode transition process is executed.

  By the way, instead of waiting in the special figure determination process until the fixed display period elapses, this special figure determination process is terminated if the period has not elapsed. Therefore, after the fixed display is started, the special figure determination process is started each time the special figure special power control process is started until the period during the fixed display elapses. In addition, when the period during the fixed display has elapsed, in a situation where the transition to the opening / closing execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special figure special counter is initialized (that is, “0” is cleared) and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is performed In such a situation, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special power counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure determination process to the one corresponding to the special electric power start process.

  If the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special electricity start process in step S611. In the special power start process, an opening command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound control device 72. In the special electricity start process, it is determined whether or not the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. When the opening period has not elapsed, this special power start process is terminated instead of waiting in the special power start process. Therefore, after the opening effect in the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special power start process is started each time the special figure special power control process is started until the opening period elapses. In addition, when the opening period has elapsed, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special power start process to the one corresponding to the special power open process. .

  If the acquired start address is SA4, the process jumps to the special electricity release process in step S612. In the special electric release opening process, one round game is started, and it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round game is satisfied. When the end condition is not satisfied, the process is not waited for in the special electricity release process, but the process for monitoring the establishment of the end condition is executed, and then the special electricity release process is terminated. When the above termination condition is satisfied, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special electric power open process to the one corresponding to the special electric power closed process. Update.

  If the acquired start address is SA5, the process jumps to the special electricity closing process in step S613. In the special electricity closing process, a process of ending one round game is executed. Further, in the interval period between round games, it is determined whether or not the interval period has elapsed. When the interval period has not elapsed, this special electric power closing process is terminated instead of waiting in the special electric power closing process. Therefore, when the interval period is started, the special power closing process is started each time the special figure special electric control process is started until the period elapses. In addition, when the interval period has elapsed, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric current closing process to the one corresponding to the special electric current opening process. To do.

  On the other hand, in the special power shut-off process for the last round game, after executing the process of ending one round game, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 so that the numerical information of the counter is changed to the special power shut-off process. Update from the corresponding one to the one corresponding to the special electricity termination processing.

  If the acquired start address is SA6, the process jumps to the special electricity ending process in step S614. In the special electric power end process, an ending command indicating that the open / close execution mode is ended is transmitted to the sound control device 72. In the special electric power end process, it is determined whether or not the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. If the ending period has not elapsed, the special electric power end processing is terminated instead of waiting in the special electric power end processing. Therefore, after the ending effect in the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special electric power end process is started every time the special figure special electric control process is started until the ending period elapses. In addition, when the ending period has elapsed, after executing processing for setting the gaming state (open / close lottery mode and support mode) after the opening / closing execution mode, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is initialized. The numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric power end process to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process.

  Next, a variation display mode of symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41 (display surface G) as an effect for game times will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19A is a schematic diagram showing types of variation display modes, and FIG. 19B is a schematic diagram showing an overview of each variation display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (a), the symbol variation display mode executed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 41 is completely off, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, super reach. C is roughly divided into 5 categories. About each of these variable display modes, the variable display time is set to be different, and the outline of the variable display mode for each game time is grasped based on the information related to the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 71. It is possible.

  Specifically, “3 sec to 8 sec” is set for the fluctuation display time that is completely out of place (a difference is set according to the number of holds), “10 sec” is set for the fluctuation display time for normal reach A, and the fluctuation display time for normal reach B Is about 15 seconds longer than the fluctuation display time of normal reach A, the fluctuation display time of super reach A is "16 sec" longer than the fluctuation display time of normal reach A and B, and the fluctuation display time of super reach B is super reach. “17 sec”, which is longer than the fluctuation display time of A, and “18 sec”, which is longer than the fluctuation display times of the other super reach A and B, as the fluctuation display time of the super reach C. It is set so that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high. For example, when the information about the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 71 is “15 sec”, the display control device 128 knows that the normal reach B should be executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 19 (b1), the fluctuation display mode of the normal reach A and B will be described. When the normal reach A or B is selected, first, the variable display (scroll display) of all the symbol sequences that are stopped is started, and then the symbol variable display is terminated in the upper symbol column Z1 (stop) In addition, in the lower symbol row Z3, the symbol variation display is terminated (stopped display). In the state where the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed in this manner, the reach symbol is displayed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 5). Is formed. Then, the reach display is performed by performing the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 under the situation where the reach line is formed. After reaching the reach display, the variable display is terminated by stopping and displaying the middle symbol row Z2. Then, the fact that the symbol that is the same as the symbol that constitutes the reach display stops on the reach line is informed that the jackpot has been won, and the other symbols on the reach line stop to win the jackpot It will be notified that it is not. In this way, the combination of symbols that are finally stopped and displayed is maintained as they are for a predetermined period. In other words, the current game time continues until the stop display period elapses, and the transition to the next game time is permitted after the stop display period elapses.

  In the present embodiment, the difference in the fluctuation display time between the normal reach A and the normal reach B is ensured by setting the difference in the fluctuation display time of the middle symbol row Z2 after the reach line is formed. The method of setting the difference is arbitrary. For example, by setting a difference in the time from when the variable display is started to when the reach line is formed, the difference in the variable display time can be secured.

  Next, the variation display mode of super reach A, B, C will be described based on the above-described variation display mode of normal reach A, B. As shown in FIGS. 19 (b2) to 19 (b4), the super reach A, B, and C form the above-described reach line through the same process as the normal reach A and B. And after forming a reach line, it is the structure which performs a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character as a moving image together with the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, after a reach line is formed in Super Reach A, a character imitating a fairy is displayed at the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME). After the reach line is formed, a character imitating a boy is displayed at the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME). In Super Reach C, the reach line is formed, A character imitating a girl is displayed at the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME).

<Confirmation process for hold notice>
Next, the confirmation process for holding notice executed in step S602 of the special electricity special figure control process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the confirmation process for the hold notice, first, in step S701, the hold information newly acquired in the hold information acquisition process in step S601 immediately before the special figure special power control process (FIG. 18) is stored in the main MPU 122. Store in register. Thereafter, in steps S702 to S7036, it is confirmed whether or not the winning information is included in the hold information acquired by the current winning.

  Specifically, first, in step S702, based on the current winning of the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34, information for determining the jackpot among the newly acquired holding information, that is, the acquired jackpot random number counter C1. Know the value of.

  In a succeeding step S703, it is determined whether or not the low probability mode is set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the low probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RWM 124. If the mode is the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S704, where the information for determining the big hit (the value of the big hit random number counter C1) grasped in step S702 with reference to the low probability mode winning / failing table corresponds to the information for winning the big hit Determine if it is in the group. In the case of the high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S705, and the determination of whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is included in the information set as the jackpot winning is made with reference to the above-described success / failure table for the high probability mode. To do.

  After step S704 or step S705, the process proceeds to step S706, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S702 corresponds to the jackpot winning. If it corresponds to the jackpot winning, the jackpot information is stored in the register of the main MPU 122 in step S707, and the confirmation process for the hold notice is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S706, the process proceeds to step S708. In step S708, based on the current winning of the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34, the information for determining the reach reach out of the newly acquired hold information, that is, the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

  In the subsequent step S709, the reach determined in step S708 with reference to the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of the ROM 123. It is specified whether the information for determination (the value of the reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as the reach winning.

  After executing the process of step S709, the process proceeds to step S710, and it is determined whether or not the reach determination information (the value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S708 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. In the case where it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, in step S711, after the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the main MPU 122, this confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, this confirmation process is terminated as it is.

<Hold command setting process>
Next, the hold command setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the hold command setting process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not jackpot information is stored in the register of the main MPU 122. In the confirmation process (FIG. 20), it is determined whether or not the information for jackpot determination is specified as corresponding to the jackpot winning. If the jackpot information is stored, the process proceeds to step S802 to set a jackpot correspondence pending command. Note that the setting of the above-described commands and the setting of various commands to be described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RWM 124.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is determined that jackpot information is not stored in the register of the main MPU 122, the process proceeds to step S803, and whether reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the main MPU 122. Whether or not the information for reach determination is identified as corresponding to the occurrence of reach in the confirmation processing for holding advance notice (FIG. 20) in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 18) is determined. Determine whether. If the reach occurrence information is stored, a release reach hold command is set in step S804, and if reach reach information is not stored, a complete release hold command is set in step S805.

  When setting a hold command in steps S802, S804, and S805, the fluctuation display time is determined with reference to the stored value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS, etc. The time-consuming information is stored in the pending command. In determining the variable display time, the variable display time table is referred to. The hold command set in this way is transmitted to the display control device 128, and the display control device 128 can grasp the variation display mode of the symbol and the like based on the hold command.

  After executing the command setting process in any of steps S802, S804, and S805, in step S806, a process of setting information on the number of hold for the hold command is executed. Specifically, as the processing, the hold command information set as described above is configured as information of a plurality of bytes, and information indicating that the command is a hold command or a hold command for some of the bits. Are included, and information on the number of holds can be set. In this case, in step S806, the information on the number of holds stored in the register of the main MPU 122 in step S701 in the confirmation process for the previous hold notice (FIG. 20) is first read, and then the hold already set is set. The read information on the reserved number is stored in the command for the reserved number information in the command by an arithmetic processing such as logical sum. Thereby, with respect to the hold command set in any of the processes of step S802, step S804, and step S805, information for specifying the number of hold information corresponding to the hold command Will be included. After executing the processing in step S806 described in detail above, the pending command setting processing is terminated.

  Note that the hold command including the information on the number of hold in step S806 is transmitted to the sound control device 72. The sound light control device 72 specifies that the hold information has increased by receiving the hold command. The sound control device 72 transmits the hold command to the display control device 128 while maintaining its form. The display control device 128 executes image data preparation processing based on the received hold command. The preparation process will be described in detail later.

  In addition, the setting method of the hold command is based on whether the display control device 128 holds the jackpot, whether the jackpot is won, if the jackpot is won, the type of jackpot at that time, if the jackpot is not won, whether the reach occurs, etc. Any design can be used as long as it can identify the variation display mode of the symbol. For example, a combination of a jackpot corresponding pending command, a miss reach pending command, and a completely miss pending command is individually set in correspondence with the number of each pending, and in the pending command setting process, a confirmation process for pending notice ( It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one pending command is selected according to the confirmation result in FIG.

<Payout status reception processing>
Next, the payout state reception process executed in step S218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  Here, the payout control device 78 periodically executes a payout state detection process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22 (for example, every 2 msec cycle), and executes a process corresponding to the reception of various commands in this process. To do. Here, the payout state detection process by the payout control device 78 will be described first, and then the payout state reception process by the main control device 71 will be described.

  In the payout state detection process, it is first determined in step S901 whether a winning ball completion state is detected. Specifically, it is confirmed that game balls corresponding to the number of prize balls of the prize ball command received from the main control device 71 are paid out from the payout device 77 (payout is completed). Note that the payout device 77 is provided with a payout detection sensor that individually detects the game balls sent to the downstream side thereof, and confirms that payout has been completed based on the output result of the payout detection sensor. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the payout motor abnormality command is stored in the transmission data storage unit in step S902, and is set as an output target. When a negative determination is made in step S901 or after execution of step S902, it is determined in step S903 whether or not a tank ball absence state is detected. Specifically, the absence of a sphere in the tank 76 is detected by confirming the output result of the sphere absence detection sensor 132. When there is a predetermined number or more of game balls stored in the tank 76, the no-ball detection sensor 132 outputs a detection signal of a LOW level corresponding to the non-detection. If the number is smaller than the predetermined number, a detection signal of HI level corresponding to the detection is output. If the detection signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and the detection signal of the HI level is detected over a plurality of processing times thereafter, it is determined that the tank ball is not in a state.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, the tank ball no command is stored in the transmission data storage unit in step S904 and set as an output target. If a negative determination is made in step S903 or after execution of step S904, it is determined in step S905 whether a lower plate full state is detected. Specifically, the full state of the lower plate 62a is detected by checking the output result of the full detection sensor 131. When the number of game balls stored in the lower tray 62a is less than a predetermined number, the full detection sensor 131 outputs a winning detection signal of a LOW level corresponding to the non-detection and when the number is equal to or more than the predetermined number. Outputs an HI level winning detection signal corresponding to the detection. When the detection signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and the detection signal of the HI level is detected over a plurality of processing times thereafter, it is determined that the lower dish is full.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S905, the lower plate full command is stored in the transmission data storage unit in step S906 and set as an output target. If a negative determination is made in step S905 or after execution of step S906, it is determined whether an abnormal end state is detected in step S907. Specifically, from the state in which any of the already described dispensing motor abnormal state, tank ball non-state, and lower plate full state is detected, the state is not detected, and each of the above-described states is performed over a plurality of processing times. When the state is not detected, it is determined that the state is abnormally ended.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S907, the abnormal end command is stored in the transmission data storage unit in step S908, and set as an output target. When a negative determination is made in step S907 or after execution of step S908, the payout state detection process is terminated.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the power from the power source and the launch control device 79 is supplied to the RWM 124 of the main control device 71, but not supplied to the RWM of the payout control device 78. With this configuration, the capacity of the power supply and launch control device 79 can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced accordingly.

  However, in this configuration, when the power supply from the external power source to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, all the information stored in the RWM of the payout control device 78 is erased (destroyed). In this case, if all the information on the number of unpaid award balls is stored in the RWM of the payout control device 78 as in the conventional pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 10 can be connected to the pachinko machine 10 in a situation where there are unpaid award balls. When the power supply is stopped, all the unpaid prize balls are erased without being paid out. If it does so, it will cause a great disadvantage to a player.

  On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, unpaid prize ball information is basically stored in the RWM 124, and when the main MPU 122 receives a HI level payout permission signal from the payout control device 78, the payout control is performed. A prize ball command is transmitted to the device 78. In the payout control device 78, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the RWM of the payout control device 78 includes the maximum number of prize balls (15 prize balls) for one winning at most, and a permission standard described later. The timing for switching the payout permission signal between the HI level and the LOW level is set so as to be the sum of the number. In addition, this permission reference number is the minimum number of winning balls for one winning or less. Thereby, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped in a situation where a large number of unpaid prize balls remain, it is possible to reduce the number of prize balls to be erased as much as possible. That is, the payout permission signal is information output from the payout control device 78 to the main MPU 122 in order to specify the output timing of the prize ball command in the main MPU 122.

  In the payout state reception process, based on information received from the payout control device 78 including the payout permission signal, it is determined whether or not it is possible to output a prize ball command to the payout control device 78. Set up.

  In the payout state reception process executed by the main controller 71, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 23, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not a tank ball no command is received from the payout controller 78. . As described above, the tank ball no command is transmitted from the payout control device 78 when the ball no detection state of the tank 76 is detected by the ball no detection sensor 132, and corresponds to a payout abnormality command.

  If the tank ball no command is received, a payout abnormality process is executed in step S1002. As a process for payout abnormality, “1” is set in a payout abnormality flag provided in the RWM 124 to set a payout abnormality state. In addition, the tank ball absence command is transmitted as a payout abnormality command to the sound light control device 72 which is the sub-side control device. In this case, in the sound and light control device 72, a payout abnormality notification is executed by the display lamp unit 58 and the speakers 91 and 101 in response to reception of the payout abnormality command. The payout abnormality notification may be executed by the symbol display device 41.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1001 or after the process of step S1002 is executed, it is determined in step S1003 whether a lower pan full command has been received from the dispensing control device 78. The lower plate full command is transmitted from the payout control device 78 when the full state of the lower plate 62a is detected by the full detection sensor 131 as described above, and corresponds to a payout abnormality command.

  If a tank ball no command is received, a payout abnormality process is executed in step S1004. As a process for payout abnormality, “1” is set in a payout abnormality flag provided in the RWM 124 to set a payout abnormality state. Further, the lower plate full command is transmitted as a payout abnormality command to the sound light control device 72 which is the sub-side control device. In this case, in the sound and light control device 72, a payout abnormality notification is executed by the display lamp unit 58 and the speakers 91 and 101 in response to reception of the payout abnormality command. The payout abnormality notification may be executed by the symbol display device 41.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1003 or after the processing in step S1004 is executed, it is determined in step S1005 whether an abnormal termination command has been received from the payout control device 78. As described above, the abnormal end command is transmitted from the payout control device 78 when a predetermined abnormality regarding the payout of the game ball is released. If an abnormal termination command has been received, processing for abnormal termination is executed in step S1006. Specifically, the payout abnormality state is canceled by clearing the payout abnormality flag of the RWM 124 to “0”.

  In the configuration in which the payout abnormality command is transmitted as described above as the payout abnormality process, the payout abnormality cancel command is transmitted to the sound control device 72 as the abnormal end process. In this case, the sound and light control device 72 terminates the payout abnormality notification that has already been executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1005 or after the processing in step S1006 is executed, it is determined in step S1007 whether or not a prize ball completion command has been received from the payout control device 78. As described above, the winning ball completion command is transmitted from the payout control device 78 when the winning ball is completed, and includes information on the number of completed winning balls.

  If the winning ball completion command has not been received, the payout state receiving process is terminated as it is. If the winning ball completion command has been received, after executing the winning ball number external output process in step S1008, The payout state reception process is terminated. In the external output process of the number of prize balls, a process for external output for causing the management computer of the game hall to recognize information on the number of prize balls completed this time is executed.

  The prize ball completion command may not be transmitted from the payout control device 78. Further, in this configuration, the payout control device 78 is also electrically connected to the external terminal board 81 so that the external output of information on the completion of the winning ball and the number of winning balls is not passed through the main MPU 122. It is good also as a structure performed with the control apparatus 78. FIG.

<Electrical configuration related to production execution control>
Next, an electrical configuration related to the execution control of the effect will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  As already described, the sound light control device 72 and the display control device 128 are provided as control devices for controlling the execution of effects based on instructions from the main control device 71. As shown in FIG. 24, the sound light control device 72 includes a sound light control board 141 on which a sub MPU 142 is mounted. In addition to the CPU 143 which is a central processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit, the sub MPU 142 incorporates a direct ROM 144 and a RWM 145. The CPU 143, the direct ROM 144, and the RWM 145 are connected to each other via a bus.

  The direct ROM 144 is configured to use, as a read-only memory, a memory that does not require external power supply (ie, a nonvolatile storage unit) such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory. The direct ROM 144 stores various control programs and fixed value data used when executing processes corresponding to the programs. The CPU 143 executes processes according to the control programs stored in the direct ROM 144. Thus, the execution of the effect based on the instruction from the main control device 71 is controlled. Since the direct ROM 144 is connected to the CPU 143 via the internal bus in the sub MPU 142, it is relatively difficult to increase the data capacity. Specifically, the data capacity is 2M. It is a byte.

  The RWM 145 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires external power supply for storage and storage, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing. When compared with the data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the direct ROM 144. The RWM 145 temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the direct ROM 144, and has various flag storage areas and various counter storage areas. It is not essential that the direct ROM 144 and the RWM 145 are integrated into one chip with respect to the sub MPU 142, and each may be configured as a separate chip.

  The sub MPU 142 determines the content of the effect in a predetermined period based on the instruction from the main control device 71, and transmits a command corresponding to the determined content of the effect to the display control device 128. Such a command uses a signal path provided to connect the sub MPU 142 and the display MPU 162.

  The display control device 128 includes a display MPU 162, a display control board 161 on which a VDP 163 provided as a drawing LSI and an image ROM 164 are mounted. In the display MPU 162, display effects in a predetermined period according to commands received from the sub MPU 142. The internal command corresponding to the content of the determined display effect is periodically transmitted to the VDP 163.

  In the VDP 163, image data is read from the image ROM 164 in accordance with the internal command received from the display MPU 162, and drawing data at the update timing of each image is created using the read image data. Then, by outputting a drawing signal corresponding to the created drawing data to the symbol display device 41, an image corresponding to each update timing is displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 41.

  Returning to the description of the sound light control device 72, the sub MPU 142 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 as well as the display control device 128 when the content of the effect in the predetermined period is determined. In this case, in FIG. 24, the sub MPU 142 and the display lamp unit 58 are described as being directly connected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub MPU 142 and the display lamp unit 58 are driven between them. A circuit may be interposed, and a relay board may be interposed.

  The sub MPU 142 executes drive control of the speakers 91 and 101 when the content of the effect in the predetermined period is determined. For the drive control of the speakers 91 and 101, the sound output LSI 146 and the common ROM 147 are used.

  The common ROM 147 is configured to use, as a read-only memory, a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory. Since the common ROM 147 is not directly connected to the CPU 143 but is externally attached to the sound output LSI 146, it is easier to increase the data capacity than the direct ROM 144. Specifically, the data capacity is 1 Gbit. However, this data capacity is arbitrary and may be 500 Mbits or 4 Gbits.

  The sound output LSI 146 includes an I / F 151, a register 152, a sound data processing unit 153, a DAC 154, and a data transfer unit 155, and outputs sound from the speakers 91 and 101 according to data transmitted from the sub MPU 142. Execute control for output.

  The I / F 151 is an interface for the sound output LSI 146 to communicate with the sub MPU 142 via the bus B1 provided as a signal path group for bidirectional communication. The bus B1 connected to the I / F 151 includes eight signal paths J1 to J8, and data is transmitted and received between the sub MPU 142 and the sound output LSI 146 via the signal paths J1 to J8. Is called.

  The register 152 has a function as a storage means for temporarily storing various data used in the sound output LSI 146, and uses a memory that requires external power supply for storage and storage for both reading and writing. Is configured to do. In addition, random access is possible, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the direct ROM 144 and the common ROM 147.

  The register 152 has a data capacity of many bytes so that a plurality of data can be stored and held simultaneously, and has a data capacity in units of kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 10 kilobytes.

  The register 152 is provided with a plurality of parameter areas and a sequence data area. The parameter area stores parameter data necessary for outputting melody and sound effects, and parameter data necessary for outputting sound. By providing a plurality of parameter areas, it is possible to output a plurality of sounds from the speakers 91 and 101 simultaneously. Sequence data is stored in the sequence data area.

  The sound data processing unit 153 converts the sequence data and parameter data transmitted from the sub MPU 142 and stored in the register 152 so that they can be used for sound output, and the content of the conversion result and the common ROM 147 The digital music sound data is created using the sound data read out from. By the way, the sequence data includes time data indicating the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds, and the parameter data includes data that defines the pitch, volume and tone color of the sound at a predetermined timing. It is.

  The sound data processing unit 153 has a function of a plurality of sound generation channels so that a plurality of different sounds can be output simultaneously. The sound data processing unit 153 synthesizes digital music sound data created for each sound generation channel to generate digital synthesized music sound data. It has a function to create. In addition, although it has a function for 16 channels as a plurality of sound generation channels, the number of channels is arbitrary. Further, by using virtual tracks, a larger number of tracks (for example, 64 tracks) than the actual number of sounding channels can be used. However, a configuration in which such virtual tracks are not used may be used.

  The DAC 154 is a digital / analog converter. The DAC 154 has a function of outputting to the speakers 91 and 101 a sound signal obtained by converting the digital musical tone data or digital synthesized musical tone data created by the sound data processing unit 153 into an analog signal as an analog voice signal. That is, it has a function of generating a sound signal from sound data.

  The speakers 91 and 101 are connected to the DAC 154 via an amplifier 171 that amplifies the sound signal. The amplifier 171 is connected to the output side of the DAC 154 in the sound light control board 141, and the speakers 91 and 101 are individually connected to the amplifier 171 via separate speaker paths 135. The sound signal output from the DAC 154 is amplified by the amplifier 171 and then input to the speakers 91 and 101.

  The amplifier 171 performs amplification on an analog signal as a sound signal, and the amplifier 171 and the speakers 91 and 101 are connected by line terminals. 24, the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101 are connected to the amplifier 171 one by one, but two upper speakers 91 are connected to the amplifier 171. In addition, two lower speakers 101 are connected to each other.

  The amplifier 171 can output a different sound signal to each of the speakers 91 and 101, thereby enabling different types of sounds to be output from the speakers 91 and 101. Yes. For example, when a sound signal for outputting a production sound is output from the DAC 154, a sound signal for outputting a medium / high sound among the production sounds is output to the upper speaker 91, and a low sound lower than the medium / high sound is output. The sound signal for making it output is output with respect to the lower speaker 101. As a result, a middle and high-priced production sound is output from the upper speaker 91, and a low-priced production sound is output from the lower speaker 101.

  In addition, the amplifier 171 can individually set the amplification factor of the sound signal output to each of the speakers 91 and 101, so that sound can be output from the speakers 91 and 101 at different volumes. It is possible to output. For example, the amplification factor of the sound signal output to the upper speaker 91 is set larger than the amplification factor of the sound signal output to the lower speaker 101. As a result, the upper speaker 91 outputs a louder sound than the lower speaker 101.

  The amplifier 171 includes a pre unit 172 as a preamplifier and a power unit 173 as a power amplifier, and the power unit 173 is disposed on the output side of the pre unit 172. The pre unit 172 has a function of amplifying the signal level of the sound signal input from the DAC 154 to the amplifier 171 to the line level, a function capable of outputting a different sound signal corresponding to each of the speakers 91 and 101, and the like. The sound signal processed by these functions is output to the power unit 173.

  The power unit 173 has a function of further amplifying the volume level of the sound signal amplified to the line level by the pre-unit 172 according to the position of the volume switch 111, and the sound signal processed by this amplification function is It outputs to each speaker 91,101. The power unit 173 individually amplifies the sound signal corresponding to each of the speakers 91 and 101 and outputs the amplified sound signal to each of the speakers 91 and 101 individually.

  Here, when the volume level of each sound signal input from the amplifier 171 to the speakers 91 and 101 exceeds the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101, the waveform of the sound signal is distorted. The sound output from the sound may sound like clipping. Note that when the rated input level or the maximum input level of the speakers 91 and 101 is exceeded, it may be assumed that the output sound is heard as if sound is broken.

  Therefore, the amplifier 171 is connected with a sound crack detection circuit 175 that detects that sound breaks occur in the sound output from the speakers 91 and 101. The sound crack detection circuit 175 detects that the volume level of the sound signal input from the amplifier 171 to the speakers 91 and 101 exceeds a predetermined reference level, and each of the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101 It is provided individually corresponding to each.

  The reference level is individually set for each sound crack detection circuit 175 according to the allowable input level of the corresponding speakers 91 and 101. The reference level is set to be the same as or slightly smaller than the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101, for example. In this case, the sound crack detection circuit 175 detects that the volume level of the sound signal input to the corresponding speakers 91 and 101 has exceeded the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101.

  An operation knob 112 is connected to each sound crack detection circuit 175. In the sound crack detection circuit 175, the reference level is increased or decreased by operating the operation knob 112. In this case, the hall manager or the like operates the operation knob 112 to variably set the reference level of the sound break detection circuit 175 in accordance with the allowable input level of the speaker 91 corresponding to the sound break detection circuit 175. Is possible.

  The sound crack detection circuit 175 acquires the maximum value of the volume level of the sound signal as a peak value, updates the peak value at a predetermined cycle, and compares the peak value with the reference level each time, thereby obtaining a volume level. Is a circuit for detecting that the reference level has been exceeded. The detailed configuration of the sound crack detection circuit 175 will be described later.

  Note that two upper speakers 91 and two lower speakers 101 are connected to the amplifier 171, and a sound crack detection circuit 175 is individually provided for each of the speakers 91 and 101. On the other hand, in FIG. 24, the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101 are omitted and illustrated one by one, and only the sound crack detection circuit 175 corresponding to the speakers 91 and 101 is illustrated. That is, in reality, there are four sound crack detection circuits 175 connected to the amplifier 171, but FIG. 24 shows only two sound crack detection circuits 175.

  Each sound crack detection circuit 175 is mounted on the sound light control board 141 and is connected to the amplifier 171 via each branch path 176 branched from each speaker path 135. In this case, each branch path 176 is connected to the input side of each sound crack detection circuit 175. Each sound crack detection circuit 175 is connected to the amplifiers 171 in parallel with the speakers 91 and 101, and the sound signal output from the amplifier 171 is input to the speakers 91 and 101 via the speaker path 135. At the same time, it is also input to the sound crack detection circuit 175 corresponding to the speakers 91 and 101 via the speaker path 135 and the branch path 176. For this reason, the sound break detection circuit 175 performs sound break detection on the sound signals input to the speakers 91 and 101.

  Each sound crack detection circuit 175 is individually connected to the sub MPU 142 via the output side path 178 and outputs a detection signal to the sub MPU 142. The sub MPU 142 individually determines whether or not sound breaks have occurred in the output sound for each of the speakers 91 and 101 based on the detection signal of each sound break detection circuit 175. For example, if each sound break detection circuit 175 detects that the volume level of the sound signal is higher than the reference level, it outputs a sound break signal as a detection signal that there is a risk of sound breakage, and the sub MPU 142 When a crack signal is received, it is determined that sound cracks have occurred in the output sound from the speakers 91 and 101. Note that the sound breaking signal corresponds to an excess signal.

  Further, a volume switch 111 and an amplifier 171 are connected to the sub MPU 142. The volume switch 111 is connected to the input side of the sub MPU 142 and outputs a detection signal to the sub MPU 142. The sub MPU 142 determines the position of the volume switch 111 based on the detection signal of the volume switch 111.

  The amplifier 171 is connected to the output side of the sub MPU 142, and the operation is controlled by the sub MPU 142. The sub MPU 142 sets the type of output sound for each of the speakers 91 and 101 by controlling the operation of the pre-unit 172 of the amplifier 171, and controls the operation of the power unit 173 for each of the speakers 91 and 101. The amplification factor of the power unit 173 is set, and thereby the sound volume for each speaker 91, 101 is adjusted.

  The sub MPU 142 sets the amplification factor of the power unit 173 according to the position of the volume switch 111. Here, in the present embodiment, the position of the volume switch 111 can be switched to the scale F in addition to the scales 0 to 5, and the position of the volume switch 111 does not have the scale F as a position. The amplification factor of the power unit 173 corresponding to each differs.

  First, a conventional volume switch that does not have the scale F will be described. In the case of a conventional volume switch, for example, when the position of the volume switch is on the scale 5, the sub MPU 142 maximizes the amplification factor of the power unit 173 so that the sound signal is amplified to the rated output of the power unit 173. When the value (100%) is set and the scale is 3 (3/5 of the maximum value), the amplification factor of the power unit 173 is set so that the sound signal is amplified to 60% of the rated output of the power unit 173. For example, it is set to 60% of the maximum value. Further, when the position of the volume switch is at the scale 0 (sound output stop), the amplification factor of the power unit 173 is set to zero in order to stop the sound output from the speakers 91 and 101.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scales 1 to 5, the output volume from the speakers 91 and 101 is set to a level that does not cause sound cracking. When the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F, the output volume from the speakers 91 and 101 is set to a level that is likely to cause sound cracking. That is, when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F, the sound output from the speakers 91 and 101 is allowed to be broken to some extent.

  When the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scales 1 to 5, the sub MPU 142 sets the amplification factor of the power unit 173 to be smaller than that of each position of the conventional volume switch, thereby making it difficult for sound cracking to occur. ing. For example, when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale 5, the amplification factor of the power unit 173 is set to 60% of the maximum value (a value corresponding to the scale 3 in the conventional volume switch). In this case, the amplification factor of the power unit 173 is set to 36% of the maximum value.

  On the other hand, when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F, the sub MPU 142 sets the amplification factor of the power unit 173 to be larger than that when the volume switch 111 is on the scale 5. Sound cracking is more likely to occur. For example, when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F, the amplification factor of the power unit 173 is set to the maximum value (a value corresponding to the scale 5 in the conventional volume switch). Incidentally, the amplification factor of the power unit 173 may be set to a value larger than the maximum value (for example, 120% of the maximum value) according to the performance of the speakers 91 and 101 and the like.

  Here, the sub MPU 142 sets the amplification factor of the power unit 173 according to the detection result by the sound crack detection circuit 175 in addition to the position of the volume switch 111. The sub MPU 142 reduces the amplification factor of the power unit 173 when it is determined that sound breakup occurs in the output sound of the speakers 91 and 101 (when a sound breakup signal is input from the sound breakage detection circuit 175). Thus, it is possible to reduce the volume level of the sound signal input to the speakers 91 and 101, thereby eliminating the sound cracking generated in the output sound from the speakers 91 and 101.

  When the position of the volume switch 111 is at the scale 0, the sub MPU 142 increases the amplification factor of the power unit 173 so as to stop the sound output from the speakers 91 and 101 as in the conventional volume switch. Set to zero. In this case, it goes without saying that sound cracking does not occur.

  The data transfer unit 155 is connected to the common ROM 147 via a bus B2 provided as a signal path group for bidirectional communication, and has a function of transferring data read from the common ROM 147 to the register 152. ing. The bus B2 provided between the data transfer unit 155 and the common ROM 147 is composed of 16 signal paths, and the number of signal paths is larger than that of the bus B1 between the sub MPU 142 and the I / F 151. It is a large number. The data communication speed between the data transfer unit 155 and the common ROM 147 is faster than the data communication speed between the sub MPU 142 and the I / F 151. The data transfer unit 155 reads out sound data necessary for sound output from the common ROM 147 based on the data converted from the sequence data and parameter data in the sound data processing unit 153 and stores it in the register 152.

  Here, the data transfer unit 155 not only has a function of transferring necessary sound data to the register 152 in the sound data processing unit 153 but also reads out necessary data from the common ROM 147 and stores it in the register 152 in the sub MPU 142. It has a function of transferring data stored in the register 152 to the sub MPU 142. A configuration related to such data transfer will be described below.

<Data Structure of Direct ROM 144 and Common ROM 147>
First, the data structures of the direct ROM 144 and the common ROM 147 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the direct ROM 144, and FIG. 25B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the common ROM 147.

  As shown in FIG. 25A, in the direct ROM 144, a program and processing data (1), a program and a process for the CPU 143 of the sub MPU 142 to execute the effect control process and the notification control process. Data (2),..., A program and processing data (P) are stored in advance. These programs and processing data include a data table used for executing each effect and notification, sequence data and parameter data for providing to the sound output LSI 146. All the programs and processing data necessary for the CPU 143 to execute the effect control process and the notification control process are directly stored in the ROM 144.

  The direct ROM 144 performs not only the program and processing data (1), the program and processing data (2),..., The program and processing data (P), but also the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58. The light emission data (1), light emission data (2),... In each of the light emission data, information on the type, lighting period, and lighting order of the light emitting unit to be turned on in the display lamp unit 58 in a predetermined production period is set, and the contents of these light emitting patterns are set. It differs depending on the type of each light emission data. Each light emission data stored in the direct ROM 144 has a different light emission control period and a different light emission pattern content.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the common ROM 147 has sound data (1), sound data (2),... Sound data (S) is stored in advance. Each of these sound data includes melody actually generated by an instrument corresponding to various timbres and waveform data obtained by sampling the sound. For melody with lyrics, the melody with lyrics is recorded by an instrument corresponding to various timbres. It includes waveform data obtained by sampling the melody and voice that are pronounced. In addition, production sound and notification sound are formed by these sound data, and these sound data are all stored in the common ROM 147.

  In the common ROM 147, not only sound data (1), sound data (2),..., Sound data (S), but also light emission data (Q + 1), light emission data (Q + 2),. ) Is stored in advance. These light emission data have different light emission control periods and the contents of the light emission patterns.

  As described above, the light emission data used by the sub MPU 142 is not only stored in the direct ROM 144 directly connected to the CPU 143 of the sub MPU 142 via the bus, but also in the common ROM 147 connected to the sound output LSI 146. It is remembered. In other words, the light emission data is distributed and stored in the direct ROM 144 and the common ROM 147.

<About sound crack detection circuit 175>
Next, the configuration of the sound crack detection circuit 175 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a circuit diagram showing an electrical configuration of the sound crack detection circuit 175.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the sound break detection circuit 175 holds the peak value of the sound signal input from the amplifier 171 as the hold value Vph, and the hold value Vph of the peak hold unit 182. The reset unit 183 to be updated and the comparison unit 184 that compares the hold value Vph of the peak hold unit 182 with the reference voltage Va as a reference level. As already described with reference to FIG. 24, in the sound crack detection circuit 175 connected to the amplifier 171 and the sub MPU 142, the peak hold unit 182 is connected to the amplifier 171 via the branch path 176, and the comparison unit 184 outputs The sub MPU 142 is connected via the side path 178.

  The peak hold unit 182 includes a hold capacitor 191 as a charging unit charged by a sound signal, and a diode 192 disposed in the forward direction on the upstream side of the hold capacitor 191. The diode 192 is a rectifying element whose output side (cathode side) is connected to the hold capacitor 191, and restricts the reverse flow of current from the hold capacitor 191 toward the amplifier 171. That is, the diode 192 restricts the negative current of the sound signal from flowing into the hold capacitor 191, while permitting the positive current to flow into the hold capacitor 191. In this case, the hold capacitor 191 is charged by the current on the positive side of the sound signal, and the charged voltage becomes the peak value of the volume level of the sound signal.

  The peak hold unit 182 includes a buffer unit 193 that performs impedance conversion in addition to the hold capacitor 191 and the diode 192. The buffer unit 193 is a voltage follower (a non-inverting amplifier circuit with an amplification factor of 1) configured to include an operational amplifier 194. The buffer unit 193 has a sufficiently large input impedance and an output impedance of It is small enough. Therefore, in the configuration in which the sound crack detection circuit 175 is connected to the output side of the amplifier 171, it is suppressed that the voltage (input voltage Vi) of the sound signal increases or decreases due to the output impedance of the amplifier 171.

  In the operational amplifier 194 of the buffer unit 193, the non-inverting input terminal (+ input terminal) is connected to the amplifier 171, and the inverting input terminal (−input terminal) and the output terminal are connected via the feedback path 195. In this case, in the voltage follower, since the + input terminal and the −input terminal of the operational amplifier 194 are in a virtual short circuit (virtual short) state, the −input terminal has the same potential as the + input terminal. Therefore, when the input voltage Vi of the sound signal is applied to the + input terminal, the input voltage Vi is applied to the − input terminal and the feedback path 195.

  In the peak hold unit 182, a diode 192 is incorporated in the buffer unit 193. The diode 192 is disposed between the operational amplifier 194 and the feedback path 195 in the buffer unit 193, the input side (anode side) is connected to the output side of the operational amplifier 194, and the output side (cathode side) is the feedback path 195. (Hold capacitor 191).

  Here, since the diode 192 is a rectifying element having a forward voltage, for example, the diode 192 is not incorporated in the buffer unit 193 but is provided between the buffer unit 193 and the hold capacitor 191. In the case (when provided on the downstream side of the feedback path 195), even if a sound signal is input to the peak hold unit 182, the input voltage Vi of the sound signal is the forward voltage of the diode 192 (for example, 0.6V). Is smaller than), no current flows through the diode 192, and the hold capacitor 191 is not charged. That is, the hold capacitor 191 cannot hold the peak value of the sound signal.

  On the other hand, in the configuration in which the diode 192 is incorporated in the buffer unit 193 as described above, even when the input voltage Vi of the sound signal is smaller than the forward voltage of the diode 192, the input voltage Vi is the feedback path 195. Therefore, the hold capacitor 191 holds the peak value of the sound signal as the hold value Vph.

  The comparison unit 184 includes a voltage generation unit 201 that generates the reference voltage Va, and a comparator 202 as a comparison unit that compares the hold value Vph held by the peak hold unit 182 with the reference voltage Va. In the sound crack detection circuit 175, the reference level is set to the reference voltage Va, the reference voltage Va is variably set according to the operation state of the operation knob 112, and the voltage generation unit 201 sets the reference voltage Va to a predetermined voltage value. It has a function to hold. That is, the voltage generation unit 201 has a function of holding the voltage value of the reference voltage Va at a value corresponding to the operation state of the operation knob 112.

  The voltage value of the reference voltage Va is preferably set to a value corresponding to the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101 by the operation knob 112. In the present embodiment, the voltage value of the reference voltage Va is set to the same value as the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101. Incidentally, the voltage value of the reference voltage Va may be set to a value larger or smaller than the allowable input level as long as an error from the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101 does not become too large.

  The comparator 202 has an inverting input terminal (−input terminal) connected to the peak hold unit 182, and a non-inverting input terminal (+ input terminal) connected to the voltage generation unit 201. Compare the input voltage values. In the comparator 202, the − input terminal is connected to the hold capacitor 191 of the peak hold unit 182, and the + input terminal is connected to the voltage generation unit 201.

  In this case, the hold value Vph of the sound signal is input to the − input terminal from the peak hold unit 182, and the reference voltage Va is input to the + input terminal from the voltage generation unit 201. For this reason, when the reference voltage Va is larger than the hold value Vph, the comparator 202 (sound break detection circuit 175) outputs an HI level signal to the sub MPU 142, and the reference voltage Va is smaller than the hold value Vph. In this case, a LOW level signal is output to the sub MPU 142. Therefore, the LOW level signal output from the comparator 202 is output from the sound break detection circuit 175 to the sub MPU 142 as the sound break signal described above.

  Note that the operational amplifier 194 and the comparator 202 are both comparison elements that compare signals input to the + input terminal and the − input terminal, but the operational amplifier 194 is formed on the assumption that it is incorporated in a feedback circuit. On the other hand, the comparator 202 is formed without assuming that it is incorporated in the feedback circuit. Specifically, the operational amplifier 194 has a phase compensation capacitor for preventing oscillation, but the comparator 202 does not have a phase compensation capacitor for preventing oscillation, and the comparator 202 is more in comparison to the operational amplifier 194. Is responsive. In other words, the operational amplifier 194 requires a shorter time from when a signal is input to when the signal is output as compared with the comparator 202.

  The voltage generation unit 201 includes a shunt regulator 203 that maintains the reference voltage Va at a predetermined voltage value, a series resistor R0 that is connected in series to the shunt regulator 203, and a first resistor R1 and a second resistor that divide the reference voltage Va. And R2. The shunt regulator 203 has a reference, a cathode, and an anode, and the cathode is connected to a + V terminal 208 to which a terminal voltage Vcc is applied via a series resistor R0. Further, the positive input terminal of the comparator 202 is connected between the series resistor R 0 and the shunt regulator 203.

  The shunt regulator 203 is a well-known voltage regulator that includes an operational amplifier and a transistor. In the shunt regulator 203, the reference voltage Vref is applied to the reference, and the reference current Iref flows. However, the reference current Iref flowing through the reference is extremely smaller than the current flowing through the cathode and anode.

  The first resistor R1 and the second resistor R2 are connected in series with each other, and the opposite side of the first resistor R1 from the second resistor R2 is connected to the + input terminal of the comparator 202. In this case, the first resistor R1 and the second resistor R2 are arranged in parallel with the shunt regulator 203 with respect to the comparator 202, and on the other hand, between the first resistor R1 and the second resistor R2. Is connected to the reference of the shunt regulator 203.

In the voltage generator 201, the reference voltage Va input to the comparator 202 is
Va = (R1 / R2 + 1) × Vref + Iref × R1 (1)
It is calculated by the following formula. Here, as described above, since Iref is sufficiently small, the reference voltage Va may be calculated with Iref being zero. For example, R1 = 10 kΩ, R2 = 10 kΩ, Va≈2.5V, applied voltage VR1 = 1.25V, applied voltage VR2 = 1.25V to R2.

  The shunt regulator 203 operates normally when the current flowing into the cathode is larger than the minimum input value necessary for the operation. The shunt regulator 203 uses the terminal current Ii supplied from the + V terminal 208 as the minimum input value. Must be set to be larger than The value of the terminal current Ii flowing into the voltage generator 201 is defined by the series resistance R0, the terminal voltage Vcc, and the reference voltage Va.

  For example, Vcc = 5V and R0 = 100Ω. In this case, a reference voltage Va smaller than the terminal voltage Vcc is generated by the terminal voltage Vcc applied to the + V terminal 208. The series resistor R 0 defines the value of the current flowing through the cathode of the shunt regulator 203, and restricts the overcurrent from flowing through the cathode of the shunt regulator 203.

  In the voltage generation unit 201, the voltage value of the reference voltage Va can be variably set. Specifically, the second resistor R2 is a variable resistor, and the reference voltage Va is changed by changing the resistance value of the second resistor R2. The resistance value of the second resistor R2 is changed in accordance with the operation of the operation knob 112. For example, the operation knob 112 is attached to the second resistor R2, and the resistance value of the second resistor R2 increases or decreases as the operation knob 112 rotates.

  As described above, the operation knob 112 is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the sound light control device 72 (see FIG. 10 and the like). For this reason, even if the operation of disassembling the sound light control device 72 to expose the sound light control board 141 is not performed, the back light pack unit 15 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13 and the sound light control device 72 is connected to the pachinko machine. By exposing it to the back side, the operation knob 112 can be operated. That is, the reference voltage Va as the reference level can be set according to the allowable input level of the corresponding speakers 91 and 101 without replacing the second resistor R2 or disassembling the sound and light control device 72.

  Since the reference voltage Va is calculated by the above equation (1), the reference voltage Va increases when the second resistor R2 is reduced, and decreases when the second resistor R2 is increased. That is, when it is desired to increase the reference voltage Va, the operation knob 112 is operated so as to decrease the second resistance R2, and when it is desired to decrease the reference voltage Va, the operation knob 112 is increased so as to increase the second resistance R2. To operate.

  In the voltage generation unit 201, the first resistor R1 may be a variable resistor. In this case, the reference voltage Va increases as the first resistance R1 is increased, and decreases as the first resistance R1 is decreased. That is, if at least one of the first resistor R1 and the second resistor R2 is a variable resistor, the reference voltage Va can be changed by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor. However, when the first resistance R1 is increased, the power loss due to the reference current Iref flowing through the first resistance R1 increases. For this reason, in order to increase the reference voltage Va, it is preferable not to increase the first resistance R1, but to decrease the second resistance R2. Therefore, it is preferable that the second resistor R2 is a variable resistor instead of the first resistor R1.

  The reset unit 183 includes a discharge unit 211 that discharges the hold capacitor 191 and a switch unit 212 that switches the discharge unit 211 to a conductive state or a non-conductive state with respect to the hold capacitor 191. The discharge unit 211 has a discharge resistor 213, and the discharge resistor 213 is grounded and connected to the hold capacitor 191 through the switch unit 212. Therefore, when the discharge resistor 213 is brought into conduction with the hold capacitor 191 by the switch unit 212, the hold capacitor 191 is grounded via the discharge resistor 213.

  The switch unit 212 is a relay such as an electromagnetic relay. The switch unit 212 includes a changeover switch 214 that makes one of the discharge unit 211 and the comparator 202 conductive to the hold capacitor 191 and a relay coil 215 that operates the changeover switch 214. The hold capacitor 191, the discharge part 211, and the comparator 202 are provided at the connection part. When the switch unit 212 is in an OFF state because no current flows through the relay coil 215, the changeover switch 214 brings the hold capacitor 191 and the comparator 202 into conduction, while the hold capacitor 191 and the discharge unit 211. And shut off. In addition, when the switch unit 212 is in an ON state due to the current flowing through the relay coil 215, the changeover switch 214 disconnects the hold capacitor 191 and the comparator 202, while the hold capacitor 191 and the discharge are discharged. The unit 211 is brought into conduction.

  In the reset unit 183, the oscillation resistor 218 is connected to the relay coil 215, and the magnitude of the current flowing through the relay coil 215 is defined by the oscillation resistor 218. In this case, the resistance value of the oscillation resistor 218 is such that the current flowing through the relay coil 215 is such that the relay coil 215 can operate the changeover switch 214 and that the relay coil 215 does not become an overcurrent. It is set to be.

  When the switch unit 212 is in the OFF state, the hold capacitor 191 is charged, and the charge voltage is input to the negative input terminal of the comparator 202 as the hold value Vph. The comparator 202 sets the hold value Vph and the reference voltage Va. A comparison is made. On the other hand, when the switch unit 212 is in the ON state, a current flows from the hold capacitor 191 to the discharge unit 211 via the changeover switch 214, whereby the hold capacitor 191 is discharged.

  An oscillation circuit 217 that outputs an oscillation signal that oscillates at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec) is connected to the relay coil 215. When the signal output from the oscillation circuit 217 is at the HI level, a current flows through the relay coil 215 and the switch unit 212 is turned on. When the signal is at the LOW level, the switch unit 212 does not flow through the relay coil 215. Is turned off. For this reason, the discharge of the hold capacitor 191 is repeatedly performed at the oscillation period of the oscillation signal.

  The period during which the oscillation signal is at the HI level is defined by the size of the oscillation resistor 218. Here, the period during which the oscillation signal is at the HI level is a predetermined discharge period (for example, 0.6 msec) in which the hold capacitor 191 is discharged. During this discharge period, the charge voltage of the hold capacitor 191 is It is preferable that the period is required to reach zero due to discharge. For this reason, the resistance value of the oscillation resistor 218 is set in accordance with the size of the hold capacitor 191.

  Here, a detection mode when a sound signal is input in the sound crack detection circuit 175 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining a detection mode of the sound crack detection circuit 175. In FIG. 27, (a) shows the transition of the input voltage Vi of the sound signal input to the sound crack detection circuit 175, (b) shows the transition of the output signal of the oscillation circuit 217, and (c). The transition of the hold value Vph of the hold capacitor 191 is shown, and (d) shows the transition of the output signal of the comparator 202.

  When a sound signal as shown in FIG. 27A is output from the amplifier 171 to the speakers 91 and 101 and the sound crack detection circuit 175, a sound corresponding to the waveform and volume level of the sound signal is output from the speakers 91 and 101. 101 and the sound signal is input to the sound crack detection circuit 175 as the input voltage Vi. In addition, as shown in FIG. 27B, an HI level signal is output from the oscillation circuit 217 with a period T.

  As shown in FIG. 27C, the peak hold unit 182 holds the maximum value (peak value) of the input voltage Vi of the sound signal in the period T as the hold value Vph. In the period T, when the output signal of the oscillation circuit 217 becomes HI level, the hold capacitor 191 is discharged, and the hold value Vph of the peak hold unit 182 is reset to zero. Thereafter, when the output signal of the oscillation circuit 217 becomes the LOW level, the discharge of the hold capacitor 191 is stopped, and the maximum value of the volume level of the sound signal is held as the hold value Vph. When the period T elapses, the hold capacitor 191 is discharged again, and the hold value Vph is reset again to zero.

  As shown in FIG. 27D, the output signal of the comparator 202 is set to the HI level when the hold value Vph is smaller than the reference voltage Va, and is set to the LOW level when the hold value Vph is larger than the reference voltage Va. The For this reason, the sound crack detection circuit 175 outputs a LOW level signal from the comparator 202 to indicate that the hold value Vph is greater than the reference voltage Va, that is, the input voltage Vi (volume level) of the sound signal is the speaker. That is, a signal indicating that the allowable input levels 91 and 101 have been exceeded is output from the comparator 184.

  For example, in a configuration in which the sound crack detection circuit 175 does not have the peak hold unit 182 and the sound signal is input to the negative input terminal of the comparator 202, the sound signal sampled at a predetermined cycle by the comparator 202. The input voltage Vi and the reference voltage Va are compared. In this case, due to the vibration of the sound signal, the sampled input voltage Vi is not necessarily the maximum value (peak value) in the predetermined period, and the input voltage Vi of the sound signal is not equal to the reference voltage Va. It is thought that the detection accuracy of exceeding is low. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the input voltage Vi of the sound signal input to the comparator 202 has a peak value (hold value Vph), the input voltage Vi of the sound signal exceeds the reference voltage Va. The detection accuracy of the presence is improved.

<Various processes executed by the sub MPU 142>
Next, processing executed by the sub MPU 142 based on a program will be described.

  The sub MPU 142 repeatedly executes the notification and effect control processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). Here, the notification and effect control processing is held at the same period as the update period (oscillation period of the oscillation circuit 217) of the hold value (peak value of the volume level of the sound signal) of the peak hold unit 182 in the sound crack detection circuit 175. Runs just before the value is updated. In other words, the hold value is updated continuously after the notification and the effect control process are executed. In addition, a program for executing the effect and the effect control process is directly read from the ROM 144 before the notification and the effect control process are executed.

  In the notification and effect control process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether a notification command or an effect command is received from the main control device 71. Examples of the notification system command include the magnet detection command, the illegal winning command, the radio wave detection command, the tank ball no command, and the lower pan full command, which have already been described. A combination with a type command, a final stop command, an opening command, an open command, a close command, and an ending command are listed. If a notification-type command or a production-type command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1102.

  In step S1102, a data table read process is executed. In the reading process, the data table corresponding to the notification command or the production command received this time is directly read from the ROM 144. As already described in the description of FIG. 25A, the data table is stored as a program and processing data in the direct ROM 144, and a plurality of types are set according to the type of notification or effect. Then, the sub MPU 142 executes light emission control and sound output control corresponding to the type of the notification system command or the production system command by executing the processing determined therewith while referring to this data table.

  Specifically, in the data table, an outline of the corresponding notification command or effect command is determined in accordance with the passage of time, and the sub MPU 142 refers to the data table to determine the emission data to be read. The type information, the type and content information of the light emission data to be executed, the sequence data to be output and the type of parameter data are grasped. Incidentally, the sub MPU 142 specifies information to be referred to in the data table at each processing timing by using the update of the pointer of the data table.

  In the subsequent step S1103, display command output processing is executed. In the output process, the display system command corresponding to the data table read in step S1102 is directly read from the ROM 144 and the read display system command is output to the display control device 128. As a result, the display control device 128 can display an image corresponding to the notification related to the current execution instruction on the symbol display device 41. The display commands are stored in the direct ROM 144 as programs and processing data.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1101, or if the process of step S1103 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, based on the information in the data table, it is determined whether it is the execution timing of the sound output control. If it is the execution timing of the sound output control, in step S1105, the sequence data and parameter data of the current sound output control target are read directly from the program and processing data in the ROM 144, and in the subsequent step S1106, the readout The sequence data and parameter data thus transmitted are transmitted to the sound output LSI 146 via the bus B1. In this case, the parameter data and sequence data transmitted to the sound output LSI 146 are stored in the register 152 of the sound output LSI 146.

  In step S1107, it is determined whether or not a sound output control effect process is to be executed. Here, it is determined whether or not the data table read from the ROM for direct 144 corresponds to the production command, and it is determined that the production process is executed when the data table corresponds to the production command. When performing the effect process, the process proceeds to step S1108, and a hold command response process for responding to the hold command output from the main control device 71 is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1104, a negative determination is made in step S1107, or if the process of step S1108 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1109 to perform a volume setting process. In the volume setting process, the volume level of the sound signal is set by setting the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 (power unit 173). A detailed description of steps S1108 and S1109 will be given later.

  In step S1110, it is determined whether a sound output signal is received. The sound output in-progress signal is a signal periodically output from the sound output LSI 146 via the bus B1 in a state in which the sound output LSI 146 can execute the output of the sound according to the output instruction from the sub MPU 142. The sound output signal is periodically monitored by a process different from the notification and effect control process. If the sound output signal is not received in a situation that should have been received, it is determined in step S1110 that the sound output signal is not received.

  If the sound output signal is received, an affirmative determination is made in step S1110, and the notification and effect control processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the sound output signal is not received, the non-output process is executed in step S1111 and then the notification and effect control process ends. In the non-output process, a notification process is performed to indicate that the sound cannot be output satisfactorily. As the notification process, for example, a configuration in which a predetermined light emitting unit emits light in a predetermined mode is conceivable, and in addition to or instead of the error display to the display control device 128, the symbol display device 41 A configuration for displaying an error is conceivable.

<Processing for pending command>
In the present embodiment, when sound cracking occurs in the speakers 91 and 101, it is possible to perform a sound cracking effect using the sound cracking for the effect. For example, when the symbol variation display mode in the symbol display device 41 is any one of Super Reach A to C, a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the sound cracking effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 25A, the direct ROM 144 stores a sound split effect lottery table (sound split effect lottery information group) in advance. The direct ROM 144 has a lottery table storage area (lottery information group storage means), and a lottery table for sound splitting effects is stored in the lottery table storage area. In this case, whether or not the sound splitting effect is performed by comparing the lottery table for the sound splitting effect with the value (numerical information) of the lottery counter for the sound splitting effect stored in the various counter areas of the RWM 145. Is determined.

  As the sound-splitting production lottery table, the jackpot result and the missed result are directly stored in the ROM 144, and the lottery table corresponding to the jackpot result is more sound-splitting than the lottery table corresponding to the missed result. Is easier to select. As a result, the winning expectation degree for the jackpot is set to be higher when the sound breaking effect is performed than when the sound breaking effect is not performed.

  Since the details of the execution processing of the sound breaking effect will be described later, the sound breaking effect will be briefly described here.

  In the case where the sound breaking effect is not won, when the sound breaking detection circuit 175 detects the occurrence of the sound breaking, it shifts to the volume restriction state in which the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is restricted, thereby The output volume is reduced, and the occurrence of sound cracking can be eliminated. In this case, the volume limit state is continued until the game times being performed at the timing when the occurrence of sound breakage is detected.

  On the other hand, when the sound breaking effect is won, the generated sound breaking is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) shorter than the required period of one game, and then the sound volume restriction state is entered. The game is released in a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) shorter than the required period of game play. However, even if the volume restriction state is canceled, if sound cracking occurs again during the same game, the sound cracking is continued for a predetermined time, and then the sound volume restriction state is entered again. That is, the period in which the volume is restricted and the period in which the volume is not restricted are repeated during one game. In this case, the production sound that has been broken and the production sound that has not been broken will be output alternately. The way is differentiated, and it is possible to diversify the production mode by sound. In addition, when the sound is broken, the sound waveform (tone color) output from the speakers 91 and 101 is different even if the sound data of the effect sound is the same, so that the player can hear the effect sound having a different tone color. It will be.

  Here, the hold command response process executed in step S1108 of the notification and effect control process (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Here, the hold command handling process corresponds to a hold command among the command handling processes executed by the sound control device 72 when a command is transmitted from the main control device 71 to the sound control device 72. .

  In the pending command handling process, it is first determined in step S1201 whether or not a jackpot handling command has been received. Here, the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72 receives a command from the main control device 71, but this received command is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the RWM 145. The command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored commands. Processing corresponding to the command can be executed satisfactorily. In the determination in step S1201, it is determined whether or not a big hit correspondence pending command has been received in the current read target area in the command storage area. It should be noted that this command read configuration is the same for the following command read.

  If a jackpot corresponding hold command has been received, information on the number of holds included in the command received this time is specified in step S1202, and the information on the specified number of holds is stored in various counter areas of the RWM 145. Set to erase counter. As will be described later, the information on the number of reserves set in the erasure counter is updated so as to be decremented by 1 every time a new game is started.

  After the erasure counter is set in step S1202, a big hit correspondence setting process is executed in steps S1203 to S1207.

  In the big hit correspondence setting process, first, in step S1203, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time corresponds to one of the super reach A to C. In this embodiment, a plurality of symbol variation display modes are set so that the jackpot winning expectation degree is different, and a configuration in which the jackpot winning expectation degree in game times is notified by each variation display mode is adopted. However, in step S1203, it is determined by referring to the variable display pattern storage area of the direct ROM 144 whether or not the hold command corresponds to the super reach A to C.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1203, the present setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if there is information corresponding to super reach A to C in the hold information, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, the lottery table for the sound breaking effect corresponding to the jackpot stored in the lottery table storage area of the direct ROM 144 is referred to, and in the subsequent step S1205, whether or not to execute the above-described sound breaking effect is determined. Execute the process.

  Specifically, the value of the lottery counter for the sound split effect is read from the lottery counter of the RWM 145, and the lottery table for the sound split effect (sound split effect lottery information group) stored in the ROM 144 for direct use is referred to. Thus, it is determined whether or not the read value of the lottery counter corresponds to the winning result. The value of the lottery counter is updated (incremented by 1) every time the hold command handling process is started, that is, at a cycle of about 2 msec.

  After executing the process of step S1205, the process proceeds to step S1206, and it is determined whether or not the sound cracking effect is won. If a negative determination is made in step S1206, the present setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207, and a sound cracking effect flag is set. The sound breaking effect flag is a flag that is set in various flag storage areas of the RWM 145, and indicates that the sound breaking effect is performed when the big hit corresponding hold command is received (hit big hit reach). Is.

  After executing the process of step S1207, the process proceeds to step S1208, and the RWM 145 corresponds to a big hit in the reserved information storage area (specifically, the area of the first area to the eighth area where no reserved information is stored). The hold information to be performed (specifically, information related to whether or not the sound breaking effect is allowed) is set, and the hold command handling process is terminated.

  Here, a supplementary description will be given of the configuration of the hold information storage area. The hold information storage area has the first area to the eighth area as described above, and is configured to store one hold information for each area. The hold information stored in the first area to the eighth area is sequentially shifted to the lower area side when the shift command is received from the main control device 71, that is, when the game is started. . Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, etc. The eighth area → the seventh area, etc. The data in each area is shifted to In the holding ball storage area of the main control device 71, the upper working port holding area and the lower working port holding area are provided separately. The hold information is stored in a time-series manner regardless of the ball tip.

  Returning to the description of step S1201 again, if it is determined in step S1201 that the jackpot corresponding hold command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, it is determined whether or not a detach reach hold command has been received.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1209, that is, if it is determined that a detach reach support hold command has been received, a detach reach support setting process is executed in steps S1210 to S1214.

  In the outreach correspondence setting process, first, in step S1210, it is determined whether or not the currently received hold command corresponds to one of the super reach A to C. In this embodiment, a plurality of symbol variation display modes are set so that the jackpot winning expectation degree is different, and a configuration in which the jackpot winning expectation degree in game times is notified by each variation display mode is adopted. However, in the above step S1210, it is determined whether or not the hold command corresponds to the super reach A to C with reference to the variable display pattern storage area of the direct ROM 144.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1210, the present setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1210, that is, if there is information corresponding to super reach A to C in the hold information, the process proceeds to step S1211. In step S1211, the lottery processing table for the sound splitting effect corresponding to the disengagement stored in the lottery table storage area of the direct ROM 144 is referred to, and the lottery processing for determining whether or not to execute the above-described sound splitting effect in step S1212. Execute.

  Specifically, the value of the lottery counter for the sound splitting effect is read from the lottery counter of the RWM 145, and the lottery counter for the read lottery is read with reference to the lottery table for the sound splitting effect stored directly in the ROM 144. It is determined whether or not the value corresponds to the winning result. The value of the lottery counter is updated (incremented by 1) every time the hold command handling process is started, that is, at a cycle of about 2 msec.

  After executing the process of step S1212, the process proceeds to step S1213, and it is determined whether or not a sound cracking effect has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S1213, the present setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1213, the process proceeds to step S1214, and a sound cracking effect flag is set. The sound breaking effect flag is a flag that is set in various flag storage areas of the RWM 145, and is set to perform a sound breaking effect when a release command corresponding to a release reach is received (out reach). It is shown.

  After executing the process of step S1214, the process proceeds to step S1208 to deal with the detachment to the reserved information storage area of RWM 145 (specifically, the smallest area of the first area to the eighth area in which no held information is stored). The hold information to be performed (specifically, information related to whether or not the sound breaking effect is allowed) is set, and the hold command handling process is terminated.

  In the hold command handling process described in detail above, it is determined whether or not the sound breaking effect is executed with reference to the hold command, and the result is stored in the hold information storage area.

  The sound light control device 72 is configured to specify an effect mode such as a change display mode when a change start command is received from the main control device 71. At this time, it is specified whether or not the sound breaking effect is performed with reference to the area corresponding to the change start command in the hold information storage area. In other words, whether or not a sound split effect is possible is specified when a hold command is received before receiving a change start command. When a change start command is received, only the specified result is referred to. There will be no lottery for sound splitting again.

<Operation in Sound Data Processing Unit 153 of Sound Output LSI 146>
Next, the operation of the sound data processing unit 153 of the sound output LSI 146 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The sound data processing unit 153 is provided as a dedicated circuit that operates independently of the sub MPU 142 and the data transfer unit 155, creates digital musical tone data based on the sequence data and parameter data transmitted from the sub MPU 142, By supplying the created digital musical sound data to the DAC 154, notification sound and effect sound are output from the speakers 91 and 101. Digital musical sound data includes data for outputting notification sounds such as messages as guidance sounds and warning sounds as fraudulent sounds (bell sound, buzzer sound, siren sound, etc.), and melody without lyrics and with lyrics Data for outputting effect sounds such as melody, sound effect, and voice are included.

  The operation will be described in detail. First, it is determined whether or not the sequence data and parameter data to be processed are stored in each parameter area and sequence data area in the register 152 (step S1301). In this determination, for example, the sequence data area and the parameter area are set to “1” when the sequence data and the parameter data are newly set by the signal output from the sub MPU 142, and the sound An area is set in which “0” is set when processing is performed in the data processing unit 153. In the sound data processing unit 153, whether sequence data and parameter data to be processed exist based on the data in the area. Determine whether or not.

  When the sequence data and parameter data to be processed exist (step S1301: YES), each parameter data is set for each tone generation channel provided in the register 152 according to the time data included in the sequence data to be processed. Are written in the corresponding areas determined by the sequence data (step S1302). Incidentally, the sound data processing unit 153 can access an area for each parameter and an area for sequence data.

  The sequence data and each parameter data set at one time are set as data capable of generating digital musical tone data for a plurality of consecutive samples for a plurality of sound generation channels. Then, according to the time data included in the sequence data, the corresponding parameter data for a plurality of samples is written in time series for each sound generation channel area.

  In addition, in the parameter data to be written here, the address of the sound data necessary for the corresponding sound generation channel and the corresponding output timing is set. The data transfer unit 155 can access the area for each tone generation channel, reads out the sound data at the address set in the parameter data for the most recent sample from the common ROM 147 and writes it in the register 152.

  The multiple samples may be all or part of a series of sounds (for example, from the start to the end of a melody), but are part of the amount of data transferred at a time. Is preferred. In addition, the sound data processing unit 153 stops the output based on the instruction from the sub MPU 142 even during the output of a series of sounds in accordance with the sequence data and parameter data already received, and generates a new series of sounds. It is good also as a structure which can start an output.

  The sound data processing unit 153 determines whether it is the creation timing of digital musical sound data based on a signal input from a clock circuit (not shown) provided in the sound output LSI 146 (step S1303). The signal output period from the clock circuit corresponds to the sampling period.

  If it is the creation timing (step S1303: YES), digital tone data is obtained for each tone generation channel based on the parameter data of the corresponding sample and the sound data already transferred to the register 152 by the data transfer unit 155. Create (step S1304). In addition, the digital musical tone data created for each of the tone generation channels is synthesized to create digital synthesized musical tone data (step S1305). Incidentally, among the parameter data written in the area for each tone generation channel, the data for which digital musical tone data has been created is deleted, and the parameter data for the most recent sample is updated.

  The sound data processing unit 153 outputs a digital synthesized musical sound data based on a signal input from a clock circuit (not shown) provided in the sound output LSI 146 that outputs a signal at a timing different from that in step S1303. It is determined whether or not (step S1306). The signal output period from the clock circuit corresponds to the sampling period. In addition, when it is the output timing of the digital synthetic musical sound data for outputting the notification sound, the digital musical sound data for outputting the production sound is not output. Thereby, when the notification sound is output from the speakers 91 and 101, the effect sound is not output.

  If it is the output timing (step S1306: YES), the generated digital synthesized musical tone data corresponding to the current output is supplied to the DAC 154 (step S1307). The DAC 154 converts the digital synthesized musical sound data supplied from the sound data processing unit 153 into an analog signal and outputs it as an analog musical sound signal to the amplifier 171 (speakers 91 and 101). Thereby, a predetermined sound is output from the speakers 91 and 101. In some cases, a plurality of types of sounds may not be output at the same time. In this case, digital synthesized musical tone data is not created, and single digital musical tone data is supplied to the DAC 154, and a corresponding single tone is output to the speaker. 91 and 101.

  In the sound data processing unit 153, whether or not the sound data is transferred from the data transfer unit 155 to the register 152 as necessary, and whether or not the analog musical sound signal is output from the DAC 154 to the amplifier 171. It is determined whether or not sound is being output through such monitoring (step S1308). If sound is being output (step S1308: YES), a sound output signal is output via the bus B1 connecting the sub MPU 142 and the sound output LSI 146. In this case, the signal path used in the bus B1 is the eighth signal path J8 used when the sub MPU 142 accesses the selector area, and the sub MPU 142 performs signal output via the eighth signal path J8. The sound output signal is output at a timing that is not present.

<Volume setting process>
Next, the volume setting process executed in step S1109 of the notification and effect control process (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the volume setting process, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the output sound from the speakers 91 and 101 is a notification sound. Here, it is determined whether or not the data table read from the ROM for direct use 144 corresponds to the notification-type command. If the data table corresponds to the notification-type command, the output sound is assumed to be the notification sound. .

  When the output sound is a notification sound, the process proceeds to step S1402, and it is determined whether or not the output sound is a fraud occurrence sound among the notification sounds. Here, it is determined whether or not the data table read from the direct ROM 144 is a fraud command among the notification commands. Examples of fraud occurrence commands include a magnet detection command, an illegal prize winning command, and a radio wave detection command. As fraudulent sounds, a magnet is brought close to the upper operating port 33 of the game board 24, a game ball is illegally won at the big winning port of the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port Examples include an alarm sound and a voice message for notifying that a radio wave is oscillating toward the mouth 34.

  If the output sound is a fraud sound, the process proceeds to step S1403, and the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to the maximum value (rated value) regardless of the position of the volume switch 111. The amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set so that the fraud sound output from each of the speakers 91 and 101 becomes the maximum volume. When the output sound is a fraud sound, the same sound signal is input to the speakers 91 and 101, and accordingly, the fraud sound having the same content is output from all the speakers 91 and 101.

  If the output sound is not a fraudulent sound, it is determined that the output sound is a guidance sound, and the process proceeds to step S1404 to perform a volume setting process for the guidance sound. Here, when the output sound is not fraudulent sound among the notification sounds, the case where the data table read from the ROM 144 for direct use is a payout abnormality command among the notification commands is included, and the output sound is a guide sound. It will be. Here, as the payout abnormality command, there are a tank ball no command and a lower plate full command, and as a guide sound, the tank 76 is in a no ball state, or the lower plate 62a is filled with a game ball. For example, a voice message for notifying that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the payout of the game ball.

  A detailed description of the guidance sound volume setting process will be given later. When the output sound is a guide sound, the same sound signal is input to the speakers 91 and 101 as in the case where the output sound is a fraud occurrence sound. A guidance sound is output.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1401, after executing the process of step S1403 or after executing the process of step S1404, the process proceeds to step S1405. In step S1405, it is determined whether or not the output sound from the speakers 91 and 101 is a production sound. Here, it is determined whether or not the data table read out from the ROM for direct use 144 corresponds to the production command, and if the data table corresponds to the production command, the output sound is assumed to be the production sound. .

  If the output sound is a production sound, the process proceeds to step S1406, and it is determined whether or not the current volume adjustment mode is set to a volume restriction mode for volume restriction. Here, based on the detection signal of the volume switch 111, it is determined whether or not the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F. If the position is on the scale F, it is assumed that the volume limit mode is set.

  When the volume restriction mode is not set, that is, when the position of the volume switch 111 is set to any one of the scales 0 to 5, the process proceeds to step S1407, and the volume switch 111 is set based on the detection signal of the volume switch 111. The position is determined, and the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to a value corresponding to the position of the volume switch 111. As described above, when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scales 0 to 5, the output volume from the speakers 91 and 101 is set to a level that does not easily cause sound cracking. The cause is considered to be limited to noise in the sound signal. In this case, even if sound cracking occurs in the production sound due to the noise of the sound signal, it is assumed that the sound cracking will end in an instant, and the occurrence of sound cracking will continuously give the player discomfort. Hateful.

  If the volume limit mode is set, that is, if the position of the volume switch 111 is set to the scale F, the process proceeds to step S1408 to perform a volume setting process of the effect sound. As described above, because the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to the maximum value, sound cracking is likely to occur in the effect sound output from the speakers 91 and 101. The amplification factor of the amplifier 171 can be changed according to the occurrence. Detailed description of the effect sound volume setting processing will be described later. After executing the process in step S1407 or after executing the process in step S1408, the volume setting process is terminated as it is.

<Guidance volume setting process>
Next, guidance sound volume setting processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the present embodiment, the volume of the guidance sound output from the speakers 91 and 101 is set uniformly (collectively) for all the speakers 91 and 101.

  In the guidance sound volume setting process, it is determined in step S1501 whether or not the volume of the speakers 91 and 101 is limited. Here, it is determined whether or not the guidance sound restriction flag is set. If the guidance sound restriction flag is set, it is determined that the volume is restricted. The guidance sound restriction flag is a flag that is set in various flag storage areas of the RWM 145, and when set, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 (power unit 173) is restricted (volume is restricted). Is shown.

  When the guidance sound restriction flag is set, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to a value smaller than the maximum value for all the speakers 91 and 101 as will be described later. That is, the output volume from all the speakers 91 and 101 is limited.

  If the volume of the speakers 91 and 101 is not limited, the process advances to step S1502 to perform processing for setting the amplification factor of the amplifier 171. In this process, in order to output the guidance sound at the maximum volume from the speakers 91 and 101, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to the maximum value (the same value as the amplification factor in the case of the scale F) regardless of the position of the volume switch 111. Set. In this case, as described above, sound cracks are likely to occur in the guidance sound output from the speakers 91 and 101. On the other hand, if the volume is restricted, the gain of the amplifier 171 is already set for all the speakers 91 and 101, and the process does not proceed to step S1502. That is, the process of setting the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 to the maximum value is not performed.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, or after the processing of step S1502 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1503. In step S1503, it is determined whether or not a sound breaking signal is received from the sound breaking detection circuit 175. Here, it is determined whether or not a sound breaking signal is received from each of the plurality of sound breaking detection circuits 175, and if a sound breaking signal is received from at least one sound breaking detection circuit 175, the sound breaking signal is Assume that you are receiving. That is, it is assumed that no sound break signal is received only when sound break signals are not received from all sound break detection circuits 175.

  When the sound breaking signal is received from the sound breaking detection circuit 175, the process proceeds to step S1504, and it is determined whether or not the sound breaking continuation timer counter Ta is set. The sound cracking continuation timer counter Ta is a timer counter set in various counter storage areas of the RWM 145, and is used for measuring the duration of sound cracking occurring in at least one of the speakers 91 and 101. .

  If the sound breaking continuation timer counter Ta is not set, the process proceeds to step S1505, and the sound breaking continuation timer counter Ta is set to zero. By setting the sound cracking continuation timer counter Ta, measurement of the duration of sound cracking occurring at the current amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is started. If the sound breaking continuation timer counter Ta has already been set, the process does not proceed to step S1505, and the process of setting the sound breaking continuation timer counter Ta to zero is not performed.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1504, or after the processing in step S1505 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1506, and the sound splitting continuation timer counter Ta is incremented by 1 (Ta = Ta + 1). That is, the sound cracking duration is measured by the sound cracking continuation timer counter Ta.

  In step S1507, it is determined whether or not any of the speakers 91 and 101 is in a sound cracking continuation state by determining whether or not the sound cracking continuation period has exceeded a predetermined sound cracking continuation determination period (for example, 100 msec). Determine. Here, a predetermined value Na (for example, 50) corresponding to the sound crack continuation determination period is set in advance, and it is determined whether or not the sound crack continuation timer counter Ta is larger than the predetermined value Na (Ta> Na). When Ta> Na, it is assumed that the sound crack continuation period exceeds the sound crack continuation determination period. That is, it is assumed that the sound cracking state is maintained.

  If any one of the speakers 91 and 101 is in a sound cracking continuation state, the process proceeds to step S1508, and volume restriction processing is performed for all the speakers 91 and 101. In this process, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is changed to a value smaller than the current amplification factor by a predetermined rate (for example, 5%). Here, the decrease amount of the amplification factor is set smaller than the decrease amount of the amplification factor when the position of the volume switch 111 is decreased by one step. If the volume level of the sound signal input to the speakers 91 and 101 is equal to or lower than the reference level of the speakers 91 and 101 due to the volume restriction process, the sound is generated in either of the speakers 91 and 101. The sound crack that was done will be eliminated.

  However, even if this volume restriction process is performed, there may be speakers 91 and 101 in which the volume level of the input sound signal is not lower than the reference level. In this case, the volume level is lower than the reference level. In the speakers 91 and 101 that are not connected, sound cracking is not eliminated. On the other hand, since the guidance sound volume setting process (step S1404 in FIG. 31) is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle, all the speakers 91 are set after changing the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 to a value smaller by a predetermined rate. , 101 is again determined for sound cracking. If either of the speakers 91 and 101 is in a sound-breaking state even when the amplification factor is reduced, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is changed to a value that is further reduced by a predetermined rate. That is, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is decreased stepwise. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably eliminate the occurrence of sound cracking in the speakers 91 and 101 while avoiding excessive reduction in the volume of the speakers 91 and 101.

  In step S1509, it is determined whether a guidance sound restriction flag is set. If the guide sound limit flag is not set, the guide sound limit flag is not set even though the volume of the guide sound is limited. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S1510, and the guide sound limit flag is set. . Setting the guidance sound restriction flag corresponds to storing that the sound volume restriction is performed for the speakers 91 and 101 that have been in a sound-breaking continuation state.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1509, or after the processing of step S1510 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1511. In step S1511, the sound breaking continuation timer counter Ta is cleared. With this process, the measurement of the duration of the occurrence of sound cracking is terminated at the current amplification factor of the amplifier 171. In addition, this processing is to newly measure the duration of occurrence of sound cracking from zero when any of the speakers 91 and 101 is again in a sound cracking continuation state even though the volume is restricted. This is also a process of resetting the sound breaking continuation timer counter Ta.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1503, a negative determination is made in step S1507, or after the process of step S1511 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1512 to cancel the volume restriction release processing of the effect sound for releasing the volume restriction. I do. After performing the process of step S1512, the guidance sound volume setting process is terminated.

  The guidance sound volume restriction release processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the guidance sound volume restriction release processing, it is determined in step S1601 whether or not the output of the guidance sound from the speakers 91 and 101 is to be terminated. Here, it is determined whether or not a payout abnormality cancel command has been received from the main control device 71, and when the payout abnormality cancel command has been received, it is determined that the output of the guidance sound is to be terminated. If it is determined that the output of the guidance sound is to end, the process proceeds to step S1602, and it is determined whether or not the volume of the speakers 91 and 101 is limited. Here, it is determined whether or not the guidance sound restriction flag is set. When the guidance sound restriction flag is set, the volume of the speakers 91 and 101 is restricted.

  When an affirmative determination is made in both steps S1601 and S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603 and the volume restriction is released. Here, the position of the volume switch 111 is determined based on the detection signal of the volume switch 111, and the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to a value corresponding to the position of the volume switch 111. In step S1604, the guidance sound restriction flag is cleared. By performing this process, data indicating that the volume has been limited is reset.

  If a negative determination is made in one of steps S1602 and S1602, the volume restriction release processing for the guidance sound is terminated.

<Processing sound volume setting processing>
Next, the volume setting process of the effect sound will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the present embodiment, when the output sound from the speakers 91 and 101 is a production sound, the volume of the production sound output from the speakers 91 and 101 is different from the case where the output sound is a guidance sound. , 101 are set individually.

  In the effect sound volume setting process, it is determined in step S1701 whether or not there is a speaker 91, 101 whose volume is not limited. Here, it is determined whether or not the production sound restriction counter S is set for each of the speakers 91 and 101, and the volume is restricted when there are speakers 91 and 101 for which the production sound restriction counter S is not set. Suppose that there are no speakers 91,101. The effect sound limit counter S is a flag that is set in the various flag storage areas of the RWM 145 in association with the speakers 91 and 101 whose volume is limited, and when set, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is limited. It shows that there is. In the various flag storage areas, it is possible to individually set the effect sound limit counter S corresponding to each of the speakers 91 and 101.

  When the production sound limit counter S is set, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to a value smaller than the maximum value for the speakers 91 and 101 to which the production sound restriction counter S corresponds as described later. Will be. That is, the output sound volume from the corresponding speakers 91 and 101 is limited by the production sound limit counter S.

  If there are speakers 91 and 101 whose volume is not limited, the process advances to step S1702 to perform processing for setting the amplification factor of the amplifier 171. In this process, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to the maximum value in accordance with the position of the volume switch 111 being on the scale F for the speakers 91 and 101 whose volume is not limited. Note that the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 has already been set for the speakers 91 and 101 whose volume is limited (the production sound limitation counter S is set), and therefore the amplification factor is set in this step S1702. do not do.

  On the other hand, when there are no speakers 91 and 101 that are not volume-limited (when all speakers 91 and 101 are volume-limited), the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is already set for all the speakers 91 and 101. The process does not proceed to step S1702. That is, the process of setting the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 to the maximum value is not performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after executing the process of step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S <b> 1703, it is determined whether or not a sound breaking signal is received from the sound breaking detection circuit 175. Here, it is determined whether or not a sound breaking signal is received from each of the plurality of sound breaking detection circuits 175, and if a sound breaking signal is received from at least one sound breaking detection circuit 175, the sound breaking signal is Assume that you are receiving. That is, it is assumed that no sound break signal is received only when sound break signals are not received from all sound break detection circuits 175.

  It should be noted that when the display is changed at each game time or in the opening / closing execution mode, the sound effects and messages are collected from the speakers 91 and 101 in addition to the melody as compared to the normal game state. Output frequency increases and the melody, sound effect, and message overlap so that the output volume easily exceeds the reference level. That is, sound cracking is likely to occur. Therefore, in the output sound, the portion that is output in accordance with the game times and the opening / closing execution mode tends to be a large volume portion, and the portion that is output in accordance with the normal gaming state is a non-high volume that is lower in volume than the large volume portion. It is easy to become a volume part.

  When the sound break signal is received from the sound break detection circuit 175, the process proceeds to step S1704, and one of the speakers 91 and 101 is specified as the sound break speaker. Here, it is determined which of the plurality of sound breaking detection circuits 175 is the output source of the sound breaking signal, and the speakers 91 and 101 corresponding to the sound breaking detection circuit 175 set as the output source are caused to generate sound breaking. Is identified as a sound-splitting speaker with a high probability of

  In step S1705, it is determined whether or not the sound breaking continuation timer counter Tb is set for the sound breaking speaker specified in the immediately preceding step S1704. The sound breaking continuation timer counter Tb is a timer counter which is set in various counter storage areas of the RWM 145 in correspondence with the sound breaking speaker, and is used for measuring the duration of sound breaking occurring in the sound breaking speaker. It is. In the various counter storage areas, it is possible to individually set the sound breaking continuation timer counter Tb corresponding to each of the speakers 91 and 101.

  If the sound breaking continuation timer counter Tb is not set for the sound breaking speaker specified in the immediately preceding step S1704, the process proceeds to step S1706, and the sound breaking continuation timer counter is set for the sound breaking speaker specified in the immediately preceding step S1704. Tb is set to zero in various counter storage areas of the RWM 145. By setting the sound cracking continuation timer counter Tb, measurement of the duration of sound cracking occurring at the current amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is started. If the sound breaking continuation timer counter Tb has already been set for the sound breaking speaker specified in the immediately preceding step S1704, the process does not proceed to step S1705, and the process of setting the sound breaking continuation timer counter Tb to zero is not performed.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1705, or after the processing in step S1706 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1707, and the sound breaking continuation timer counter Tb is incremented by 1 (Tb = Tb + 1) for the sound breaking speaker. That is, the sound cracking duration of the sound cracking speaker is measured by the sound cracking continuation timer counter Tb. Here, when a plurality of effect sound limit timer counters are set, all effect sound limit timer counters are incremented by one. Thereby, when there are a plurality of sound-breaking speakers, the duration of sound-breaking is individually measured for all sound-breaking speakers.

  In step S1708, the sound cracking speaker is in a sound cracking continuation state by determining whether or not the sound cracking continuation period continues beyond a predetermined sound cracking continuation determination period (for example, 100 msec). It is determined whether or not. Here, a predetermined value Nb (for example, 50) corresponding to the sound breaking continuation determination period is set in advance, and it is determined whether the sound breaking continuation timer counter Tb is larger than the predetermined value Nb (Tb> Nb), When Tb> Nb, it is assumed that the sound crack continuation period exceeds the sound crack continuation determination period. That is, it is assumed that the sound cracking speaker is in a sound cracking continuous state.

  When there are a plurality of sound breaking speakers, it is determined whether or not Tb> Nb for each of the sound breaking continuation timer counters Tb set corresponding to each sound breaking speaker, and Tb> Nb. If there is at least one sound-breaking speaker determined to be present, it is determined that there is at least one sound-breaking speaker in a sound-breaking continuation state, and step S1708 is positively determined.

  If there is a sound-breaking speaker in a sound-breaking state, the process advances to step S1709 to determine whether or not to perform a sound-breaking effect. Here, it is determined whether or not the sound breaking effect flag is set, and it is assumed that the sound breaking effect is performed when the sound breaking effect flag is set. Note that, as already described, the sound breaking effect flag is set in steps S1207 and S1214 of the hold command response process (FIG. 29), and indicates that the sound breaking effect is won by being set. .

  When the sound breaking effect is not performed, the process proceeds to step S1710, and the sound volume restriction process is performed for the sound breaking speaker in the sound breaking continuous state. In this process, the sound cracking speaker that is in a sound cracking continuation state at the current amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set as a target of sound cracking cancellation, and the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to a predetermined rate (for example, 5%) from the current amplification factor. Change it to a smaller value. Here, the decrease amount of the amplification factor is set smaller than the decrease amount of the amplification factor when the position of the volume switch 111 is decreased by one step. For a speaker that is subject to sound crack elimination, sound cracking is eliminated when the volume restriction process is performed and the volume level of the input sound signal is below the reference level.

  However, even if the volume restriction processing is performed on the speaker for which sound cracking is to be eliminated, the volume level of the input sound signal may not be lower than the reference level. In this case, the sound cracking is not eliminated. However, since the guidance sound volume setting process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle, after the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is changed and set to a value smaller by a predetermined factor, determination of sound cracking for all speakers 91 and 101 is made. Is done again. And even if it is a sound crack elimination target speaker, when sound cracking occurs and sound cracking continues, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is changed to a smaller value by a predetermined rate. That is, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is decreased stepwise. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the volume of the speakers 91 and 101 from becoming excessively small, and to reliably eliminate the occurrence of sound cracks in the speakers 91 and 101.

  In step S1711, it is determined whether or not the production sound limit counter S is set for the speaker whose volume is limited in the immediately preceding step S1710. If there is a speaker in which the production sound restriction counter S is not set even though the sound volume is restricted in the immediately preceding step S1710, the process proceeds to step S1712, and the production sound for the speaker whose sound volume is restricted in the immediately preceding step S1710. A limit counter S is set. Setting the production sound restriction counter S corresponds to storing that the sound volume restriction has been applied to the sound breaking speaker that has been in the sound breaking continuation state. Note that, even for a speaker that is a target for sound crack elimination, for a speaker that has already been set with a production sound restriction counter S (volume restriction before the previous step S1710), the production sound restriction counter S Do not set.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1711, or after the processing of step S1712 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1713. In step S1713, the effect sound limit counter S is incremented by 1 (S = S + 1) for the speaker whose volume is limited in the immediately preceding step S1710. In other words, the number of times that the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is reduced by a predetermined value (the number of volume restriction steps executed in an overlapping manner) is counted by the effect sound restriction counter S for the volume-limited speaker. If there are a plurality of loudspeakers whose volume is restricted in the immediately preceding step S1710, the effect sound restriction counter S is incremented by 1 to count the number of volume restriction stages that have been executed for all of these speakers.

  In step S1714, the sound breaking continuation timer counter Tb is cleared for the speaker whose volume is limited in the immediately preceding step S1710. With this process, the measurement of the duration of the occurrence of sound cracking is ended for the speakers 91 and 101 whose volume is limited at the current amplification factor of the amplifier 171. This process is performed for the sound-breaking continuation timer counter in order to newly measure the duration of sound-breaking from zero when sound-breaking occurs again for a loudspeaker-restricted speaker even though the volume is restricted. It is also a process of resetting Tb.

  After executing the process of step S1714, in step S1715, a volume harmony process is performed to balance the volume of the sound-breaking speaker and the non-breaking speaker. If a negative determination is made in step S1703, a negative determination is made in step S1708, or after the processing in step S1715 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1716, and the volume restriction of the effect sound for releasing the volume restriction is performed. Perform release processing. Detailed description of the volume restriction release processing will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the sound split effect is performed (when step S1709 is YES), the process proceeds to step S1717, and it is determined whether the effect sound limit counter S is set. If the production sound limit counter S is not set, there is a sound cracking speaker in a sound cracking continuation state, but it is determined that the sound volume restriction processing has not yet been performed for the sound cracking speaker, and the process proceeds to step S1718.

  In step S1718, it is determined whether or not it is time to start volume restriction in the sound split effect. Here, while measuring the elapsed period after the sound cracking speaker is in a sound cracking continuation state, it is determined whether or not the elapsed period has exceeded the sound cracking period for the production, and the elapsed period is the sound cracking period for the production. It is assumed that the volume restriction start timing is exceeded. The effect sound breaking period is set to a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) regardless of whether the hold command received from the main control device 71 corresponds to any of the super reach A to C.

  Note that the effect sound splitting period may be set in accordance with the reach mode to which the hold command corresponds. For example, the effect sound cracking period may be set shorter as the reach expectation level of the reach mode corresponding to the hold command is higher. Specifically, the production sound breaking period is set to the shortest period (for example, 1 second) when the hold command corresponds to the super reach C having the highest winning expectation, and the super reach A having the lowest winning expectation is set. May be set to the longest period (for example, 3 seconds). In this case, when corresponding to the super reach B, it is preferable to set the length between the periods corresponding to the super reach A and the super reach C (for example, 2 seconds).

  If it is not the volume restriction start timing, the process directly proceeds to step S1716, and this volume setting process is repeatedly executed until the volume restriction start timing is reached. If it is not the volume restriction start timing, it may be configured to wait in step S1718 until the volume restriction start timing. In this case, it is preferable that the volume setting process is not executed during the period of waiting in S1718.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1717 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1718, the processing in steps S1710 to S1715 is executed in the same manner as in the case where a negative determination is made in step S1709. That is, after reaching the volume restriction start timing, the volume restriction is performed on the speaker that is the target of sound crack elimination.

<Volume harmony processing>
When the speakers 91 and 101 are mixed with a speaker that is a target for sound crack elimination and a speaker that is not a target for sound crack elimination, if the volume restriction is performed only for the speakers that are the target for sound crack elimination, There is a concern that the difference in amplification factor (difference in output sound volume) of the amplifier 171 becomes excessively large between speakers that are not subject to crack elimination, and the balance of output sound volume among these speakers is lost. However, for a speaker that is not subject to sound crack elimination, if the volume restriction is performed in the same manner as the speaker that is subject to sound crack elimination, the output sound volume from all the speakers 91 and 101 is simply reduced, and the effect that the output sound has. There is a concern that it will decrease.

  Therefore, in order to balance the output volume of the speaker that is the target of sound crack elimination and the speaker that is not the target of sound cracking when the number of stages of volume restriction for the speaker targeted for sound crack elimination reaches a predetermined number, Volume harmony processing is performed to limit the volume of speakers that are not subject to crack elimination. In the volume setting process, for example, every time the number of volume restriction steps for a speaker that is a target for sound crack elimination reaches two or four steps, the sound volume restriction is performed only for one step even for speakers that are not subject to sound crack removal. ing.

  Here, the volume harmony process executed in step S1714 of the effect sound volume setting process (FIG. 34) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the volume harmony process, it is determined in step S1801 whether there is a speaker that is not a target for sound crack elimination. Here, it is determined whether or not the production sound restriction counter S is set for each of the speakers 91 and 101, and if there is even one speaker for which the production sound restriction counter S is not set, the sound crack elimination target Suppose there is a speaker that is not. Here, as already described in the explanation of step S1713, the production sound limit counter S counts the number of times of volume limit performed repeatedly for the volume-limited speakers. If the production sound limit counter S is 1, the volume restriction is performed only in one stage. If the production sound restriction counter S is 4, the volume restriction is performed in four stages.

  If there is a speaker that is not a sound crack elimination target, the process proceeds to step S1802, and if there is no speaker that is not a sound crack elimination target, that is, if all the speakers 91 and 101 are a sound crack elimination target, the volume adjustment processing is performed as it is. Exit.

  In step S1802, it is determined whether or not the effect sound limit counter S is M times 4 (M is a natural number) (S = 4 × M). That is, it is determined whether or not the volume limit that has been implemented has reached a level that is a multiple of 4, such as 4 levels, 8 levels, and 12 levels. Here, the determination as to whether or not the number of volume restriction steps performed for the sound crack elimination target speaker is M times the first determination value is performed by substituting 4 for the first determination value. Yes, affirmative determination is made when the number of stages of volume restriction is one of multiples of 4, (4, 8, 12,...).

  When the production sound limit counter S is M times 4 (when the volume limit reaches a multiple of 4), the process proceeds to step S1803, and the volume limit process is performed for speakers that are not subject to sound crack elimination. Therefore, the volume is limited only by one level. Here, a speaker that is not in a sound cracking continuation state at the current amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set as a speaker that is not a target of sound crack elimination, and the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to a predetermined rate (a target of sound crack elimination target) from the current gain. Change it to a smaller value (same as the speaker's lowering range). When there are a plurality of speakers that are not the target of sound crack elimination, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is lowered by one step for all of the speakers that are not the target of sound crack elimination.

  When such processing is performed, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is reduced by four steps (the number of steps of the first determination value) for the speaker for which sound cracking is to be eliminated. One step down. That is, the amplification factor of the sound breaking speaker and the amplification factor of the non-sound breaking speaker are lowered by a ratio of 4: 1. As a result, it is possible to suppress the output volume of the speaker that is the target of sound crack elimination from becoming extremely small compared to the output volume of the speaker that is not the target of sound crack elimination, thereby maintaining the balance of the output volume.

  When the production sound limit counter S is not M times 4 (when the volume limit has not reached a multiple of 4), the process proceeds to step S1804, where the production sound limit counter S is M times 2 (M is It is determined whether or not (natural number) (S = 2 × M). That is, it is determined whether or not the volume limit that has been implemented has reached a level that is a multiple of 2, excluding a multiple of 4, such as 2 levels, 6 levels, and 10 levels. Here, the determination as to whether or not the number of volume restriction steps performed for the sound crack elimination target speaker is M times the second determination value smaller than the first determination value is set to 2 as the second determination value. When the number of stages of volume restriction is one of multiples of 2, excluding multiples of 4, (2, 6, 10...), An affirmative determination is made.

  When the production sound limit counter S is M times 2 (when the volume limit reaches a multiple of 2 except for a multiple of 4), the process proceeds to step S1805, where the lower speaker 101 is the target of sound crack elimination. It is determined whether or not. Here, it is determined whether or not each of the pair of lower speakers 101 is a sound crack elimination target, and when at least one of the pair of lower speakers 101 is a sound crack elimination target, It is assumed that the speaker 101 is a target for eliminating sound cracking.

  If the lower speaker 101 is a target for sound crack elimination, the process proceeds to step S1806, and the sound volume restriction process is performed on the speaker that is not the target for sound crack elimination, thereby restricting the volume by one level. Here, as in step S1802, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is smaller than the current amplification factor by a predetermined rate (same as the lowering rate of the speaker for which sound cracking is to be eliminated) for all speakers that are not the target for sound cracking elimination. Change to When there are a plurality of speakers that are not the target of sound crack elimination, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is lowered by one step for all of the speakers that are not the target of sound crack elimination.

  When such a process is performed, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is decreased for the speakers that are not subject to sound cracking as the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is decreased by two levels (the number of steps of the second determination value) for the speakers that are to be eliminated. One step down. That is, the amplification factor of the sound-breaking speaker and the amplification factor of the non-sound-breaking speaker are lowered at a ratio of 2: 1. As a result, it is possible to suppress the output volume of the speaker that is the target of sound crack elimination from becoming extremely small compared to the output volume of the speaker that is not the target of sound crack elimination, thereby maintaining the balance of the output volume.

  If both of the pair of lower speakers 101 are not targeted for sound crack elimination, that is, if one of the pair of upper speakers 91 is subject to sound crack elimination, the process proceeds to step S1807, and the pair of upper speakers 101 Of the speakers 91 that are not subject to sound crack elimination, volume restriction processing is performed to limit the volume by one level. Here, for the upper speaker 91 that is not subject to sound crack elimination, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is changed to a value that is smaller than the current amplification factor by a predetermined rate (same as the reduction width of the speaker subject to sound crack elimination).

  When such processing is performed, as the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is lowered by two steps (the number of steps of the second determination value) for the speaker for which sound cracking is to be eliminated, the amplifier for the speaker that is not subject to sound cracking among the upper speakers 91. The amplification factor of 171 is lowered by one step. As a result, the output volume of the speaker that is the target of sound crack elimination among the pair of upper speakers 91 is suppressed from becoming extremely small compared to the output volume of the speaker that is not the target of sound crack elimination, thereby Balance can be maintained. On the other hand, even if the pair of lower speakers 101 is not a target for sound crack elimination, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is not reduced but is kept at the current amplification factor. As a result, in a configuration in which middle and high sounds are output from the upper speaker 91 and low sounds are output from the lower speaker 101, the output volume of the lower speaker 101 becomes too small for sound volume adjustment, and it is difficult to hear low sounds. Can be suppressed.

  When the production sound limit counter S is neither M times 4 nor 2M times (when the volume limit reaches an odd number level), it is assumed that the volume limit process is not performed for the speaker that is not the target of sound crack elimination. This volume harmony process is complete | finished. As described above, even if the volume restriction for the sound crack elimination target speaker is performed in one stage, by securing the stage in which the volume restriction is not implemented for the speaker that is not the sound crack elimination target, A difference can be given to the number of stages of volume restriction between speakers that are not crack-resolving targets.

  After executing step S1803, after executing step S1806, or after executing step S1807, the process proceeds to step S1808. In step S1808, for the purpose of harmonizing the sound volume with the speaker that is the target of sound crack elimination in any of the immediately preceding steps S1803, S1806, and S1807, the speaker whose volume is restricted although it is not the target of sound crack elimination. Set the volume harmony flag. The volume harmonization flag is a flag that is set in various flag storage areas of the RWM 145, and when set, indicates that the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is limited even though it is not subject to sound crack elimination. It is.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 36, a description will be given of how the volume level of the sound signal input to each of the speaker that is the target of sound crack elimination and the speaker that is not the target of sound crack cancellation when the volume harmony processing is executed is described with reference to FIG. To do. FIG. 36 is a time chart illustrating how the actual volume level of the sound signal input to each of the speakers 91 and 101 is changed. FIG. 36 (a) shows that one of the pair of lower speakers 101 eliminates sound cracking. The time chart when it is set as the target is shown, and (b) shows the time chart when one of the pair of upper speakers 91 is set as the target for sound crack elimination. In FIG. 36, the vertical axis represents the volume level, and the hold value of the volume level of the sound signal is illustrated as the actual volume level. Here, the vibration of the actual volume level is omitted, and the fluctuation of the actual volume level is shown in a simplified manner.

  In FIG. 36 (a), for the lower left speaker 101 of the pair of lower speakers 101, the actual volume level exceeds the allowable input level (reference level), and sound cracking has occurred. On the other hand, the actual sound volume level is lowered by one step by reducing the amplification factor by one step at the timing T1 with the lower speaker 101 on the left as a sound crack elimination target. For the left lower speaker 101, even if the actual sound volume level is lowered by one step, the sound cracking is not eliminated, and the amplification factor is lowered step by step, and finally the actual sound volume level is allowed by being lowered by a total of four steps. Below the input level, sound cracking has been eliminated.

  For all the speakers 91 and 101 other than the left lower speaker 101, the actual volume level is allowed at the timing T1 for the other speakers 91 and 101 (the pair of upper speaker 91 and right lower speaker 101). The sound level is below the input level and no sound cracking has occurred. Here, with respect to the other speakers 91 and 101 that are not cracked, if the amplification factor is reduced by the same number of steps as the left lower speaker 101 that is cracked, the output volume from all the speakers 91 and 101 is increased. There is a risk that the production effect by the production sound will be reduced. However, if the amplification factor of the other speakers 91 and 101 that are not cracked is not lowered, the left lower speaker 101 (sound cracking speaker) can be eliminated even if the sound cracking at the left lower speaker 101 can be eliminated. And other speakers 91 and 101 (non-sound-breaking speakers), the difference in the actual volume level becomes too large, and the balance of the output volume between the lower speaker 101 and the other speakers 91 and 101 is lost.

  On the other hand, for all of the other speakers 91 and 101, at the timing T2 when the actual volume level of the left lower speaker 101 where the sound is broken is lowered by two stages, and at the timing T3 lowered by four stages, The actual volume level is lowered by one step each. Thereby, it is suppressed that the difference in the actual sound volume level between the lower left speaker 101 and the other speakers 91 and 101 becomes too large. In this case, even if the volume is reduced in order to eliminate the sound cracking of one of the pair of lower speakers 101, the volume of the left and right lower speakers 101 can be balanced. The volume of the lower speaker 101 can also be balanced. Therefore, for all the speakers 91 and 101, it is possible to balance the sound volume between the speaker where the sound is broken and the speaker where the sound is not broken.

  Incidentally, the actual volume level of the lower left speaker 101 and the actual volume levels of the other speakers 91 and 101 are lowered at a ratio of 2: 1.

  In FIG. 36B, the actual loudness level of the right upper speaker 91 out of the pair of upper speakers 91 exceeds the allowable input level, and sound cracking occurs. In contrast, at the timing T4, the actual volume level is lowered by one step by reducing the actual amplification factor by one step with the right upper speaker 91 as a sound crack elimination target. For the upper speaker 91 on the right, even if the actual volume level is lowered by one step, the sound cracking is not eliminated, and the actual volume level is finally lowered by a total of five steps. Below the input level, sound cracking has been eliminated.

  For all the speakers 91 and 101 other than the right upper speaker 91, the actual volume level is lower than the allowable input level at time T4, and no sound cracking occurs.

  On the other hand, for the left upper speaker 91 that is not cracked among the pair of upper speakers 91, the timing T5 when the actual volume level of the right upper speaker 91 that is cracked is lowered by two stages, and 4 At the timing T6 at which the level is lowered, the actual volume level is lowered by one step each. As a result, for the pair of upper speakers 91, the difference in the actual volume level between the right upper speaker 91 (sound-breaking speaker) and the left upper speaker 91 (non-sounding speaker) is suppressed from becoming too large. Yes. In this case, even if the volume is reduced in order to eliminate the sound cracking of one of the pair of upper speakers 91, the volume of the left and right upper speakers 91 can be balanced.

  For the pair of lower speakers 101 that are not broken, the actual volume level is lowered by one level at the timing T5 when the actual volume level of the right upper speaker 91 that is broken is lowered by four stages. However, at the timing T4 when the actual sound volume level of the right upper speaker 91 is lowered by four stages, the actual sound volume level is not lowered. In this case, for the pair of upper speakers 91, the actual volume level of the right upper speaker 91 and the actual volume level of the left upper speaker 91 are lowered at a ratio of 2: 1, while The actual volume level and the actual volume level of each lower speaker 101 are lowered at a ratio of 4: 1. That is, compared to the actual volume level of the right upper speaker 91 and the left upper speaker 91 arranged side by side on the left and right, the actual volume level of each of the lower speakers 101 arranged side by side with the right upper speaker 91 is higher. The amount of lowering has been reduced. Thereby, the output sound of the pair of lower speakers 101 can be kept at a loud volume as much as possible.

Here, in the configuration in which middle and high sounds are output from the upper speaker 91 and low sounds are output from the lower speaker 101, the lower speaker 101 has the same actual volume level for the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101. It is considered that the low tone output from is less conspicuous than the middle and high tone output from the upper speaker 91. Therefore, if both of the pair of lower speakers 101 are not cracked, the actual volume level of each lower speaker 101 is reduced with respect to the actual volume level of the upper speaker 91. Even in such a case, it is difficult for the low sound output from the lower speaker 101 to stand out more excessively than the medium to high sound output from the upper speaker 91. Therefore, by keeping the output sound from the pair of lower speakers 101 at as high a volume as possible, it is possible to suppress that the output sound volume of all the speakers 91 and 101 becomes small and the presentation effect is lowered.
<Guidance sound volume restriction release processing>
Next, the volume restriction release processing for effect sound executed in step S1715 of the effect sound volume setting process (FIG. 34) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the volume restriction release processing of the effect sound, it is determined in step S1901 whether or not there is a speaker that is a target for sound crack elimination. Here, for each of the speakers 91 and 101, it is determined whether or not the production sound limit counter S is set. To do.

  If there is a speaker for which sound cracking is to be eliminated, the process advances to step S1902 to determine whether or not to perform a sound cracking effect. Here, it is determined whether or not the sound breaking effect flag is set, and it is assumed that the sound breaking effect is performed when the sound breaking effect flag is set. As described above, the sound breaking effect flag is set in steps S1207 and S1214 of the hold command handling process (FIG. 29), and is a flag indicating that the sound breaking effect is won by being set.

  When performing the sound breaking effect, the process proceeds to step S1903, and it is determined whether it is time to end the sound breaking effect. Here, the elapsed period from the start of the symbol variable display on the symbol display device 41 is measured, and whether or not the elapsed period has exceeded the symbol variable display time corresponding to each of the super reach A to C. When the elapsed period exceeds the symbol variation display time, it is assumed that it is the end timing of the sound cracking effect. That is, the timing at which each game round is ended is set as the timing at which the sound cracking effect is ended.

  If it is not the end timing of the sound cracking effect, the process proceeds to step S1904, where it is determined whether it is time to cancel the volume restriction. Here, while measuring the elapsed period from the start of volume restriction on the speaker for which sound cracking is to be eliminated, it is determined whether the elapsed period has exceeded the production restriction period, and the elapsed period is set as the production restriction period. It is assumed that it is the execution timing of the volume restriction release when exceeding. In this case, the production restriction period is set to the same period (eg, 2 seconds) as the production sound cracking period, regardless of which of the super-reach A to C the hold command received from the main control device 71 corresponds to. Has been. In addition, the sum of the production restriction period and the production sound cracking period is set to be smaller than ½ of the design variable display period. It will be done multiple times.

  In addition, the production restriction period may be set to a period different from the production sound cracking period. Further, the production limitation period may be set in accordance with the reach mode to which the hold command corresponds. For example, the effect sound cracking period may be set shorter as the reach expectation level of the reach mode corresponding to the hold command is higher. Specifically, the production restriction period is set to the shortest period (for example, 1 second) when the hold command corresponds to the super reach C having the highest winning expectation level, and is set to the super reach A having the lowest winning expectation degree. In the case of corresponding, the longest period (for example, 3 seconds) may be set. In this case, when corresponding to the super reach B, it is preferable to set the length between the periods corresponding to the super reach A and the super reach C (for example, 2 seconds).

  If it is time to cancel the volume restriction, the process advances to step S1905 to release the volume restriction for the speaker whose volume is restricted. Here, in accordance with the position of the volume switch 111 being on the scale F, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is returned to the maximum value for each of the speakers 91 and 101. Note that the speaker whose volume restriction is released in this process includes not only a speaker that is a target for sound crack elimination but also a speaker that is not a target for sound crack elimination (a speaker whose volume is restricted by the volume harmonization process). If the volume restriction is canceled for a speaker that is not subject to sound cracking cancellation, the volume harmony flag set for that speaker (the flag set in step S1808 of the volume harmony process) is cleared.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1904, or after the process of step S1905 is executed, the volume restriction release processing for the effect sound is terminated without releasing the volume restriction.

  If it is the end timing of the sound cracking effect (if step S1903 is YES), the process proceeds to step S1904 and the sound cracking effect flag is cleared. By performing this process, data indicating that the sound breaking effect has been performed is reset.

  In step S1907, similarly to step S1905, the volume restriction of the effect sound is canceled for the speaker whose volume is restricted. Here, in accordance with the position of the volume switch 111 being on the scale F, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to the maximum value for each of the speakers 91 and 101. In addition, the volume restriction is canceled for both the speaker that is the target of sound crack elimination and the speaker that is not the subject of sound crack elimination, and the volume harmony flag is cleared for the speaker that is not the subject of sound crack elimination.

  In step S1908, the effect sound limit counter S is cleared. By performing this process, data indicating that the volume of the effect sound has been limited is reset.

  When the sound split effect is not performed (NO in step S1902), the process proceeds to step S1909, and it is determined whether or not the variable display (game times) is being performed in the normal gaming state. That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the symbol variable display is started in the symbol display device 41, and if it has not elapsed, the variable display is in progress. If the variable display is being performed, the process advances to step S1910 to determine whether or not the current variable display is terminated. Here, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of symbols, and the variable display is terminated when it has elapsed.

  When the current variation display is terminated, the processes of steps S1907 and S1908 are performed in the same manner as after the process of step S1906 is performed. As a result, even when the sound split effect is not performed, the volume restriction is released with the end of the variable display as a break.

  When the variable display is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S1911, and it is determined whether or not it is time to cancel the volume restriction of the effect sound. Here, it is determined whether or not the normal gaming state, and if it is the normal gaming state, the elapsed time period after starting the volume restriction of the production sound is longer than the production restriction period ( For example, it is determined whether or not 10 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing at which the elapsed period has passed the normal restriction period is defined as the volume restriction release timing. Further, when it is not in the normal gaming state, that is, in the opening / closing execution mode (special gaming state), it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is ended, and the timing at which the opening / closing execution mode is ended is set to the volume limit. Release timing.

  If it is time to release the volume restriction of the effect sound, the process proceeds to step S1912, and the volume restriction is released for the speaker whose volume is restricted as in steps S1905 and S1907. Here, in accordance with the position of the volume switch 111 being on the scale F, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is returned to the maximum value for each of the speakers 91 and 101. In addition, the volume restriction is canceled for both the speaker that is the target of sound crack elimination and the speaker that is not the subject of sound crack elimination, and the volume harmony flag is cleared for the speaker that is not the subject of sound crack elimination.

  Here, referring to FIG. 38, how the actual volume level changes when the volume restriction is executed and canceled for each of the fraud sound, the guidance sound, and the effect sound output from the speakers 91 and 101. However, it will be explained. FIGS. 38A and 38B are time charts illustrating how the actual sound volume levels change for the speakers 91 and 101. FIG. 38A shows a time chart of fraudulent sound, FIG. 38B shows a time chart of guidance sound, The time chart of the effect sound when the sound split effect is not performed is shown in c), and the time chart of the effect sound when the sound break effect is performed is shown in (d).

  In FIG. 38, as in FIG. 36, the vertical axis represents the actual volume level, and the hold value of the volume level of the sound signal is illustrated as the actual volume level. Moreover, in (a)-(d), the change aspect of the real volume level about the speaker in which the sound crack has generate | occur | produced among each speaker 91,101 is illustrated.

  In FIG. 38 (a), at the timing T7, the output of fraudulent sound is started from the speaker, and simultaneously with the start, the actual volume level exceeds the allowable input level (reference level), and sound cracking occurs. Yes. On the other hand, volume restriction is not performed on the speaker in which sound cracking occurs, and sound cracking continues until the fraudulent sound output is finished at timing T8. In this case, since it is prioritized to output the fraud sound so that it can be heard by the hall manager etc. at a high volume, rather than suppressing the occurrence of sound breakup in the fraud sound, even if sound cracking has occurred The volume is not reduced until the fraud sound output ends. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably notify the hall manager or the like that the fraud has occurred with a loud fraud sound.

  In FIG. 38 (b), at timing T9, the output of the guidance sound is started from the speaker, and simultaneously with the start, the actual volume level exceeds the allowable input level, and sound cracking occurs. On the other hand, volume restriction is performed for a speaker with broken sound. Specifically, the amplification factor of the sound-breaking speaker is lowered step by step, and at the timing T10 when the amplification factor is lowered by two steps, the actual volume level falls below the allowable input level, and the sound breaking is eliminated. The The volume restriction is continued until the output of the guidance sound is finished at timing T11.

  In this case, since the volume of the guidance sound is gradually reduced, the volume of the guidance sound is set to a level that does not break the sound from the beginning (for example, the position of the volume switch 111 corresponds to the scale 5). Unlike the case where the volume of the guidance sound is reduced to a level that does not cause the sound to be broken after the sound is broken, a loud volume can be secured as much as possible in a range where the sound is not broken. As a result, even if the guidance sound output from the speakers 91 and 101 is a voice message, it is possible to secure a sufficient volume for listening and to suppress the sound quality from being difficult to hear due to sound cracking. it can.

  In the case where the output sound is a guidance sound, if any one of the speakers 91 and 101 is broken, the volume is restricted for all the speakers.

  38 (c) and (d), when the variable display corresponding to any of the super reach A to C is started, the actual sound volume level of the effect sound exceeds the allowable input level at the same time as the start. Sound cracking has occurred.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38 (c), when the sound split effect is not won and the sound split effect is not performed, the sound crack generation is started at timing T12, Volume restriction is applied to the broken speaker. Specifically, when a sound-breaking speaker is in a sound-breaking state, the actual volume level is reached at timing T13 when the amplification factor of the speaker is lowered stepwise and the amplification factor is lowered by three steps. Is below the allowable input level, and sound cracking is eliminated. Here, since the sound split effect is not performed, the volume restriction is continued until the current fluctuation display is terminated at timing T14. Thereby, it can suppress giving a player unpleasant feeling by a sound crack during a fluctuation display.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38 (d), when the sound cracking effect is selected and the sound cracking effect is performed, the sound cracking speaker is started after the generation of the sound cracking is started at timing T15. Volume restriction is temporarily performed for. Specifically, when the sound-breaking speaker is in a sound-breaking state, the amplification factor for the sound-breaking speaker at the timing T16 when the elapsed period after the sound-breaking exceeds the effect sound-breaking period La. Is started step by step, and at the timing T17 when the amplification factor is lowered by three levels, the actual volume level falls below the allowable input level, and sound cracking is eliminated. Then, the volume restriction is released at timing T18 when the duration during which volume restriction is performed from timing T17 exceeds the production restriction period Lb. Note that the production sound splitting period La and the production restriction period Lb are set to the same size (for example, 2 seconds).

  When sound splitting occurs again at the timing T18 with the release of the volume restriction, the volume restriction is performed again after the stage sound breaking period La has passed, as in the period from the timing T15 to T18. The volume restriction is released again after the use restriction period Lb elapses. In this case, until the timing T19 when the current variation display is finished, a state where the sound breakage is generated without restricting the sound volume and a state where the sound volume is not restricted while the sound volume is restricted are repeated. In this way, by repeatedly generating sound cracking at a predetermined cycle, it is possible to increase the winning expectation during the reach effect as compared to the case where the sound effect is not won.

  Regardless of whether or not a sound cracking effect is being performed, when canceling the sound cracking of the effect sound, the volume of the effect sound is gradually reduced in the same manner as when eliminating the sound cracking of the guide sound. For this reason, it is possible to secure a loud volume as much as possible within a range where no sound breaks occur in the production sound. As a result, it is possible to secure a sufficient volume for enhancing the effect of the effect sound output from the speakers 91 and 101, and to suppress the sound quality that is uncomfortable for the player due to sound cracking.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

<Configuration in which the branch path 176 branches from the speaker path 135>
Since the sound break detection circuit 175 is provided for the speakers 91 and 101, it is possible to detect that sound breaks have occurred in the output sound from the speakers 91 and 101. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 and eliminate the sound cracking in accordance with the timing when the sound cracking occurs in the speakers 91 and 101.

  Moreover, since the sound crack detection circuit 175 is connected to the branch path 176 from the speaker path 135 to which the speakers 91 and 101 are connected, each sound crack detection circuit 175 is actually input to the speakers 91 and 101. Sound crack detection can be performed on a target sound signal. In this case, compared with the configuration in which each speaker 91, 101 and each sound crack detection circuit 175 are individually connected to the amplifier 171, detection of the sound crack occurrence in the speakers 91, 101 by the sound crack detection circuit 175 is detected. Accuracy can be increased. As a result, the sound crack detection circuit 175 erroneously detects sound cracks even though no sound cracks occur in the speakers 91 and 101, and the sound crack detection circuit despite sound cracks occurring. 175 can suppress that sound cracking is not detected.

  When the sound break detection circuit 175 detects the occurrence of sound break in the speakers 91 and 101, the sound volume is limited for the speakers 91 and 101, so that the sound break can be quickly eliminated. In addition, since the volume restriction is realized by reducing the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplifier 171 by the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72, for example, unlike the configuration for notifying the occurrence of sound cracking, hall management It is possible to prevent the user from operating the volume switch 111 to reduce the volume and to delay the timing for reducing the output volume from the speakers 91 and 101 with respect to the timing at which the sound is broken. That is, sound cracks at the speakers 91 and 101 can be quickly eliminated.

  When sound cracks occur in the speakers 91 and 101, the volume restriction is performed in a plurality of stages, so that the output volume from the speakers 91 and 101 can be prevented from being excessively reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable such that it is difficult to hear the guidance sound and the effect sound or the game performance is lowered.

  When sound volume restriction is performed in multiple stages when sound breakage occurs, sound crack determination is performed to determine whether sound breakage has occurred each time the volume restriction is performed, so that the volume level of the sound signal is Even if the reference level is not exceeded, it is possible to suppress further volume restriction. Therefore, it can suppress that the output sound volume from the speakers 91 and 101 becomes excessively small.

  Since the sound crack continuation determination period is secured as a standby period between the time when the volume restriction is performed and the next volume restriction is performed due to the occurrence of sound cracking, the volume restriction is not reduced at a plurality of stages at once. The output volume can be gradually reduced by multiplying the number of times the volume is limited by the sound crack continuation determination period. Therefore, it is possible to relieve the uncomfortable feeling given to the player by reducing the output volume at once.

  When sound crack detection is detected by the sound crack detection circuit 175, the sound volume is limited on the condition that the sound crack duration has reached the sound crack continuation determination period. There is no volume restriction. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the output volume from the speakers 91 and 101 is excessively decreased due to the noise of the sound signal. In addition, the duration of sound cracking can be measured using a standby period secured between the first volume restriction and the next volume restriction. In this case, unlike the configuration in which the timing for measuring the duration of sound cracking and the standby period are arranged in time series, the measurement timing for sound cracking and the standby period are secured simultaneously in time series. It becomes unnecessary to secure an extra period or volume limit.

  In the sound crack detection circuit 175, since the volume level of the sound signal and the reference level are compared by the comparator 202, for example, the sound crack detection response can be improved as compared with the configuration compared by the operational amplifier. Therefore, in the configuration in which the sound break detection circuit 175 and the speakers 91 and 101 are connected in parallel to the amplifier 171, the sound break detection circuit 175 is used for the timing when the sound break occurs in the speakers 91 and 101. It can suppress that the timing of sound crack detection is delayed.

  Since the reference voltage Va as the reference level is set to a constant voltage by the voltage generation unit 201, it is possible to suppress the reference level from increasing or decreasing due to power supply voltage fluctuation. Thus, the reference level can be kept constant according to the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101. Therefore, it can suppress that the detection accuracy of the sound crack detection circuit 175 falls by the fluctuation | variation of a power supply voltage. In addition, since the reference voltage Va as a constant voltage has a voltage value smaller than the terminal voltage Vcc applied to the + V terminal 208, the reference voltage Va is boosted to generate the reference voltage Va. The circuit configuration for generating the reference voltage Va can be simplified.

  Since the peak value of the sound signal is held as the hold value by the peak hold unit 182, the comparator 202 can compare the peak value of the sound signal with the reference level. Therefore, it can be avoided that the sound crack detection circuit 175 cannot detect the occurrence of sound cracking even though the peak value of the sound signal is larger than the reference level.

  In the peak hold unit 182, the diode 192 can regulate that the charging voltage of the hold capacitor 191 decreases due to natural discharge. Thereby, it can suppress that an error arises between the hold value of the peak hold part 182 and the peak value of an actual sound signal.

  Since the diode 192 is incorporated in the buffer unit 193 having the feedback circuit of the operational amplifier 194 in the peak hold unit 182, even if the volume level of the sound signal is smaller than the forward voltage of the diode 192, the hold capacitor 191 is generated by the sound signal. Can be charged. That is, the peak value of the sound signal can be held as a hold value.

  The reset unit 183 can repeatedly hold the peak value of each sound signal as a hold value by deleting the hold value held by the peak hold unit 182 to zero. Since each hold value is repeatedly input to the comparator 202, the comparator 202 can compare the peak value of each sound signal with the reference level.

  Since the hold capacitor 191 is cut off from the other when the switch 214 is connected to one of the discharge unit 211 and the comparator 202 by the changeover switch 214, the hold capacitor 191 is in the middle of discharging the hold capacitor 191. The charging voltage of the capacitor 191 is not input to the comparator 202. Thereby, it can be avoided that the charging voltage of the hold capacitor 191 is compared with the reference level during the reset of the peak hold unit 182 and the comparison accuracy by the comparator 202 is lowered.

  In addition, since the changeover switch 214 is switched at a predetermined cycle by the oscillation circuit 217, it is possible to repeatedly discharge the hold capacitor 191 and input the hold value from the hold capacitor 191 to the comparator 202. In addition, since the discharge unit 211 grounds the hold capacitor 191 via the discharge resistor 213, it is possible to suppress a large current from flowing through the discharge unit 211 as the hold capacitor 191 is discharged. Accordingly, the reset of the hold capacitor 191 can be suitably performed by the reset unit 183.

  Since the reset operation of the hold value by the reset unit 183 is performed immediately after the sub-MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72 performs the notification and effect control processing (sound crack determination in steps S1503 and S1703), the hold value is reset. The sub MPU 142 uses the comparison result between the hold value and the reference level as the detection result of the sound crack detection circuit 175 at the timing when the maximum value of the sound signal is held as the hold value in one cycle (one cycle of the oscillation circuit 217). Will get. For this reason, when the occurrence of sound breakage is detected by the sound breakage detection circuit 175, the sub MPU 142 can reliably receive the sound breakage signal output from the sound breakage detection circuit 175. Thereby, the determination precision of the sound crack determination (process of step S1503, S1703) performed in alerting | reporting and effect control processing can be improved.

  On the other hand, for example, when the reset operation of the hold value is performed immediately before the execution of the notification and effect control process, the peak value of the sound signal in one cycle of the oscillation circuit 217 may be held by the peak hold unit 182. The sub MPU 142 obtains the comparison result between the hold value after clearing the peak value and the reference level. For this reason, even if the occurrence of sound breakage is detected by the sound breakage detection circuit 175, there is a high possibility that the sub MPU 142 cannot receive the sound breakage signal output from the sound breakage detection circuit 175. Thereby, the determination accuracy of sound crack determination will be lowered.

<Differences in Attachment between Speakers 91 and 101 and Common ROM 147>
Since the occurrence of sound breakage in the speakers 91 and 101 is detected by the sound breakage detection circuit 175, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of sound breakage at the timing when the sound breakage occurs. In this case, even if the output sound is a loud sound with a large volume part and a non-large volume part, the sound volume can be reduced by reducing the volume for the loud volume part, It can be avoided that the volume of the portion is excessively reduced. Therefore, for the sound data created by the designer or the like, the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101 are provided in the front door frame 14 and the outer frame 11, and the common ROM 147 for storing the sound data is provided in the inner frame 13. Because of this, even if the volume level balance between the high volume portion and the non-large volume portion does not match the performance (allowable input level) of the speakers 91 and 101, a production sound or the like is output from the speakers 91 and 101. It can output suitably. Thereby, when a designer etc. produce sound data, it can suppress that the creation freedom falls.

  Since the sound crack detection circuit 175 is provided in the inner frame 13, when the new inner frame 13 is installed in accordance with the model change of the pachinko machine 10, the speakers 91 and 101 together with the front door frame 14 and the like are installed. Even if diverted from the machine 10, the sound crack detection circuit 175 can be newly installed for the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the configuration in which the sound crack detection circuit 175 is provided in the sound light control device 72 together with the common ROM 147, the sound crack detection circuit 175 is mounted on the pachinko machine 10 before the designers create sound data. It becomes possible to know. As a result, the designer or the like can create sound data after recognizing that the degree of freedom in creating sound data for outputting performance sound or the like is high.

  Further, in the configuration in which the sound crack detection circuit 175 is provided in the inner frame 13, the wiring that connects the sound crack detection circuit 175 and the sound light control device 72 (wiring that forms the speaker path 135 and the branch path 176) is internal. Since the frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are not straddled, the wiring is illegally cut, or an unauthorized substrate is connected to the sound light control device 72 instead of the sound crack detection circuit 175. Deterrence can be exerted against the sound light control device 72 being illegally controlled by the unauthorized substrate.

  In the pachinko machine 10 in which the speakers 91 and 101 are provided in the front door frame 14, the amplifier 171 is provided in the inner frame 13, so that the rated output of the amplifier 171 and the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101 are compatible. However, since the sound crack detection circuit 175 detects the occurrence of sound cracking, it is possible to suitably eliminate the sound cracking.

  When the output volume from the speakers 91 and 101 is limited in order to eliminate the sound cracking at the speakers 91 and 101, the volume limit is the timing at which the variable display ends and the duration of the volume limit is the normal limit period. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the sound cracking in the high sound volume portion of the output sound and to avoid the sound volume becoming excessively small in the non-high sound volume portion. In this case, it is possible to suppress the non-loud volume portion from becoming difficult to hear, and to suppress the reduction of the effect produced by the inflection of the effect sound or the like.

  When the output volume from the speakers 91 and 101 is limited for the purpose of eliminating the sound cracking of the guidance sound, the restriction on the output volume is released at the timing when the output of the guidance sound is terminated. It is possible to avoid the volume restriction being continued even though the output of the guidance sound that has been completed is completed. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the sound volume of other types of sounds such as effect sound output after the output of the guidance sound is excessively reduced even though no sound cracking occurs. In other words, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of another sound different from the guide sound after performing the sound crack elimination of the guide sound.

  When the output volume from the speakers 91 and 101 is limited for the purpose of eliminating the sound cracking of the production sound, the limitation on the output volume is released in accordance with the timing when the fluctuation display is finished each time. It can be avoided that the volume restriction is continued even though the fluctuation display is completed. As a result, for other production sounds and notification sounds that are output after the fluctuation display where sound cracking has occurred is finished, the sound volume is excessively reduced even though sound cracking has not occurred. Can be avoided. In other words, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the effect of the effect produced by the effect sound corresponding to the next change display after executing the cracking of the effect sound for the current change display.

  Since the sound crack detection circuit 175 can change the reference level, which serves as a reference for whether or not sound cracking has occurred, according to the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101, the speaker 91 and 101 are manufactured. Regardless of the manufacturer and type, it is possible to avoid that the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101 does not match the reference level. Therefore, when the volume level of the sound signal generated from the sound data does not match the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101, or when the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101 includes a tolerance, the speaker By setting the reference level in accordance with the actual allowable input levels 91 and 101, it is possible to increase the detection accuracy of the sound crack detection by the sound crack detection circuit 175.

  In the sound crack detection circuit 175, since the voltage value of the reference voltage Va generated by the voltage generation unit 201 is set to the reference level, the reference level is easily changed by changing the voltage value of the reference voltage Va. be able to. The reference voltage Va can be changed by an easy operation of changing the resistance value of the second resistor R2, which is a variable resistor in the voltage generator 201.

  Since the voltage generation unit 201 includes the shunt regulator 203, it is possible to increase the holding accuracy for holding the voltage value (reference level) of the reference voltage Va at a predetermined value. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the detection accuracy of the sound crack detection circuit 175 is lowered due to the fluctuation of the reference level. In the voltage generator 201, the first resistor R1 is a fixed resistor out of the first resistor R1 and the second resistor R2 connected in series. Therefore, unlike the configuration in which the first resistor R1 is a variable resistor, It can be avoided that the power loss in the first resistor R1 increases due to the reference current flowing through the reference of the shunt regulator 203 due to the resistance value of the first resistor R1 being increased.

  Since the operation knob 112 for adjusting the reference level of the sound crack detection circuit 175 is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the sound light control device 72, for example, the initial value of the reference level (when the pachinko machine 10 is delivered to the game hall) The reference level can be easily changed to a value suitable for the allowable input level of the speakers 91, 101 even if the value of the reference level is not a value suitable for the allowable input level of the speakers 91, 101. In addition, since the operation knob 112 is arranged at a position that does not overlap the switch opening 113 formed in the back pack 73, the operation knob 112 is erroneously operated by a player or the like after once setting the reference level. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reference level from being changed unintentionally. On the other hand, when changing the reference level, the operation knob 112 is exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine by an easy operation of opening the back pack unit 15 with respect to the inner frame 13, so the operation knob 112 is operated. Can be prevented from becoming excessively difficult. Therefore, the hall manager can suitably manage the reference level.

<About having a plurality of speakers 91 and 101>
Since the sound crack detection circuit 175 is individually provided for each of the speakers 91 and 101, the sound volume is limited for the speaker in which sound cracking occurs, and the sound volume is set for the speaker in which sound cracking does not occur. It becomes possible not to restrict. Therefore, when sound cracks occur in some of the speakers 91 and 101, the sound cracks can be eliminated, and the output sounds of all the speakers are reduced to have the output sounds. It can avoid that an effect falls.

  Since each sound crack detection circuit 175 is provided with the operation knob 112 individually, the reference level can be individually set for each sound crack detection circuit 175 by operating each operation knob 112. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the detection accuracy of the occurrence of sound cracks for each sound crack detection circuit 175.

  By performing volume restriction on the speakers 91 and 101 in which the occurrence of sound breakage is detected by each sound breakage detection circuit 175, sound breakup can be quickly eliminated. In addition, since the volume restriction is realized by the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 being reduced by the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72, the volume manager 111 or the player or the like can eliminate the sound cracking by the volume switch 111. There is no need to perform operations such as operating.

  When sound cracking has occurred in some of the speakers 91 and 101, volume restriction is also performed on the speaker without sound cracking in addition to the speaker with sound cracking occurring. For this reason, the difference in volume between the speaker in which sound cracking has occurred and the speaker in which sound cracking has not occurred does not become excessively large. As a result, when sound cracks occur in the middle and high sounds output from the upper speaker 91, only the middle and high sounds are reduced in volume and only the low sound output from the lower speaker 101 is noticeable. When the sound is broken in the bass output from 101, it can be suppressed that the volume is reduced only by the bass and only the middle and high tone output from the upper speaker 91 is conspicuous. Therefore, the balance of the sound volume can be suitably maintained between the speaker in which sound cracking has occurred and the speaker in which sound cracking has not occurred.

  Since the output volume reduction range for the speakers in which sound cracking does not occur is smaller than the output volume reduction range for the speaker in which sound cracking occurs, the output for all speakers 91 and 101 Unlike the case where the volume reduction is made uniform, it is possible to eliminate the sound cracking while suppressing the effect of the output sound from being reduced.

  In addition to speakers with sound cracks, volume restriction is performed in multiple stages for speakers without sound cracks, which means that the output volume of speakers without sound cracks will be excessively reduced. Can be suppressed. In addition, since the number of steps at which the sound volume is reduced for the speakers without sound cracking is smaller than the number of steps at which the sound volume is reduced for speakers with sound cracking, all the speakers 91. , 101 can be prevented from simply reducing the output volume and reducing the production effect.

  When there is a plurality of speakers in which sound cracking has occurred in each of the speakers 91 and 101 and no sound cracking has occurred, volume restriction is individually performed for these speakers, so that all speakers in which sound cracking has not occurred It is possible to suitably balance the output volumes from the speakers while suppressing that the output effect is simply reduced and the effect of the performance is reduced.

  In addition, when the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101 are included in the speakers in which no sound cracking has occurred, the upper and lower speakers 91 and 101 have different output volume reduction widths. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable in how each output sound is heard from the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101. This is because the distance from the player's head to the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101 is different, and the way the sound output from the speakers 91 and 101 is heard is also different.

  In addition, since the upper speaker 91 that outputs middle and high sounds and the lower speaker 101 that outputs low sounds have different output sound pitches (frequency bands), the lower volume of the output volume is reduced between the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101. It is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable in the way the middle and high sounds are heard. This is because it is considered that the way in which the output sound from the speakers 91 and 101 is heard differs between the middle and high sounds.

  When sound cracking has occurred in at least one of the upper speakers 91 and no sound cracking has occurred in each lower speaker 101, the lowering volume of the output volume is the same for the lower speakers 101 as a set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by making the lower volume of the output volume of the lower speakers 101 that output the bass different from each other. In addition, from the common point that each lower speaker 101 is disposed below the front door frame 14, the output volume from each lower speaker 101 is not different from each other by making the output volume of the lower speaker 101 lower. A sense of incongruity is less likely to occur in the way the sound is heard.

<About the configuration in which volume restriction processing is performed when sound cracking occurs>
When the sound break detection circuit 175 detects the occurrence of the sound break, the sound restriction is performed by the sub MPU 142 on the speakers 91 and 101 where the sound break occurs (steps S1508 and S1710). Can be quickly resolved. Specifically, when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F, the output volume is reduced with the occurrence of sound breakage, so that sound breakup can be quickly eliminated. On the other hand, when the position of the volume switch 111 is not on the scale F, the volume restriction process is not performed even if the sound cracking occurs, so priority is given to maintaining the volume over eliminating the sound cracking. be able to. This means that operating the volume switch 111 selects whether to give priority to the elimination of sound cracking or the maintenance of the output volume for the output sound from the speakers 91 and 101. In addition, the selection can be performed by an easy operation of operating the volume switch 111.

  When the output sound from the speakers 91 and 101 is a production sound, volume restriction is performed for the purpose of eliminating sound cracking on the condition that the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F. Depending on the degree of contribution of the production sound to increasing the sound level, the hall manager or the like can appropriately select whether to give priority to the elimination of sound cracking or the maintenance of the volume by operating the volume switch 111. .

  In addition, when the output sound is a production sound, if the position of the volume switch 111 is not set to the scale F, the sound crack determination whether or not the sound crack detection is detected by the sound crack detection circuit 175 (steps S1503 and S1703). Therefore, the processing load on the sub MPU 142 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the sound split determination is performed even when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F.

  If the output sound is fraudulent sound, even if the fraudulent sound is cracked and the position of the volume switch 111 is set to the scale F, volume restriction is not performed for the purpose of eliminating sound cracking. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the volume of the fraudulent sound is reduced and the fraudulent sound is less noticeable than the performance sound of the other pachinko machine 10. That is, it can suppress that the fraud alerting effect peculiar to fraud occurrence sound falls. In addition, when the output sound is a fraud sound, the sound break determination is not performed regardless of the position of the volume switch 111, so that the sound break determination is performed even when the output sound is a fraud sound. Thus, the processing burden on the sub MPU 142 can be reduced.

  When the output sound is a guide sound, if the guide sound is broken, even if the position of the volume switch 111 is not set to the scale F, the volume restriction for the purpose of eliminating the sound break is forced. Therefore, even if the guidance sound is a voice message, it can be suppressed that the voice message becomes difficult to hear due to sound cracking. Therefore, it can suppress that the guidance effect peculiar to the guidance sound by a voice message falls.

  When the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F, the amplification factor of the sound signal at the amplifier 171 is set to a value larger than that when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale 5, so that the output sound is broken. Although it is easy to occur, for hall managers, setting the position of the volume switch 111 to the scale F is to prioritize the elimination of sound cracking for the production sound and to set the output volume. You will do both. Therefore, the volume switch 111 can facilitate the work of setting the output volume and canceling sound cracking.

  Here, since the volume switch 111 is provided on the back side of the inner frame 13 so that the operation by the player becomes difficult, the hall manager can suitably manage the state of the volume switch 111. On the other hand, since it is necessary for the hall manager to open the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 in order to operate the volume switch 111, it is preferable for the hall manager that work related to the volume switch 111 is facilitated. is there.

  The volume switch 111 has a function for the hall manager to variably set the output volume from the speakers 91 and 101, in addition to the function of selecting whether or not to limit the volume for the purpose of eliminating sound cracks. Therefore, the number of members for providing both functions to the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which dedicated operation means having these functions are individually provided. Thereby, the cost burden and assembly man-hour of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Since the volume switch 111 and the sound crack detection circuit 175 are connected to the sound light control device 72 instead of the main control device 71, the unauthorized board is replaced with the sound light control device 72 instead of the volume switch 111 and the sound break detection circuit 175. Even if connected to, it is possible to avoid the fact that the main control device 71 is controlled by the fraudulent board and that winning the lottery lottery or shifting to the special gaming state is illegally performed. Thereby, the countermeasure with respect to making a privilege improperly given to the pachinko machine 10 provided with the volume switch 111 and the sound crack detection circuit 175 can be suitably given.

<About sound cracking judgment to determine that sound cracking has occurred>
When the sound break detection circuit 175 detects the occurrence of sound break in the production sound, the sound MP is determined by the sub MPU 142 as to whether or not sound break is occurring. A crack can be eliminated suitably. When sound cracking occurs in the production sound, the expectation to the jackpot can be increased by continuing the sound cracking by making the timing for canceling the sound cracking different each time. That is, it is possible to enhance the production effect by the production sound by sound cracking.

  Because the duration from when sound cracking occurs to the cancellation of the sound cracking differs depending on whether or not the lottery for the sound cracking effect is won, the sound produced will be differentiated by sound cracking. be able to. If you win the sound-splitting lottery, the sound will continue for the duration of the sound-splitting period, so the player will compare it with the case where the sound cracking is resolved quickly without winning the lottery. If there is an event of sound cracking that would give the player discomfort, the effect of the production sound can be enhanced.

  Here, even if it is the effect sound formed from one sound data, the waveform of the sound output from the speakers 91 and 101 differs depending on whether or not the sound is broken. . That is, a plurality of types of effect sounds having different timbres are output using one sound data. In this case, since the types of effect sounds output from the speakers 91 and 101 are increased without increasing the sound data stored in the common ROM 147 of the sound light control device 72, the capacity of the common ROM 147 is increased. Even if it is not increased, the production sound can be diversified, and the production effect by the production sound can be enhanced.

  In the state where the volume of the production sound is limited for the purpose of eliminating sound cracking, if the lottery for the sound cracking production is not won, the volume restriction will continue for a longer normal restriction period than if it was won. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the large volume portion of the production sound has ended at the timing when the volume restriction is released, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of sound cracking again at that timing. In this case, it is difficult to cause a situation in which the volume restriction is performed again at the timing when the volume restriction is released, and therefore it is possible to suppress repeated execution and release of the volume restriction. Therefore, the occurrence of sound cracking in the production sound can be suitably suppressed.

  On the other hand, if the lottery for the sound split effect is won, the volume limit will be continued only for a limited period for the effect as compared to the case where it is not won. There is a high possibility that the sound is not finished, and the sound cracking is likely to occur again at that timing. In this case, the volume restriction is performed again at the timing when the volume restriction is released, and it is easy to repeat the execution and release of the volume restriction, and the player can easily recognize that the repetition is intentional. That is, it is possible to improve the gameability by making the player recognize the sound breaking effect.

  Since the lottery of the sound cracking effect is performed based on the winning at the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, the sound cracking is generated by the effect sound while the symbol display on the symbol display device 41 is being performed. If it occurs, a sound cracking effect can be executed. Thereby, the expectation degree with respect to the stop result of the variable display can be further enhanced by the sound cracking effect. Moreover, since the sound cracking effect is performed in accordance with the reach effect even in the variable display of the symbols, it is suitable for increasing the expectation for the stop result of the variable display. Furthermore, since the sound cracking effect is performed in accordance with the effects of super reach A to C among the variable display of symbols, it is even more suitable for increasing the degree of expectation with respect to the stop display of the variable display.

  In the case where a sound cracking effect is performed in accordance with the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41, the sum of the sound cracking period for effecting and the time limit period for effecting, which is the duration of occurrence and elimination of sound cracking, is Therefore, it is possible to repeat the generation and elimination of sound cracking a plurality of times in the sound cracking effect. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the sound breaking effect is being performed.

  Since the sound splitting effect ends with the end of the variation display of the symbol, for example, the case where the variable display is performed is different from the configuration in which the sound cracking effect is performed regardless of whether or not the variable display is performed. It is possible to differentiate the production sound from the case where it is not broken by the sound cracking production. For this reason, the expectation degree with respect to the jackpot during the fluctuation display can be suitably increased by the sound cracking effect.

<Second Embodiment>
In the second embodiment, the structure of the sound crack detection circuit 175 is different from that of the first embodiment, and the structure of the sound crack detection circuit 175 is described with reference to FIG. The difference will be mainly described. FIG. 39 is a circuit diagram showing an electrical configuration of the sound crack detection circuit 175 in the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 39, an FET 221 is provided as a rectifier in the peak hold unit 182 of the sound crack detection circuit 175. The FET 221 is a junction type field effect transistor (JFET), and has a gate, a source, and a drain having a diode structure. In this diode structure, a leakage current flowing in the opposite direction is extremely small. The FET 221 is arranged in the forward direction on the upstream side of the hold capacitor 191 with the source and drain connected. In the FET 221, the gate is connected to the output side of the operational amplifier 194, and the source and drain are connected to the input side of the hold capacitor 191.

  The FET 221 restricts the negative current of the sound signal from flowing into the hold capacitor 191, while allowing the positive current to flow into the hold capacitor 191, as with the diode 192 in the first embodiment. doing. Here, the FET 221 has a smaller leakage current flowing in the reverse direction than the diode 192, and the peak value of the sound signal is held as the hold value by the charge voltage of the hold capacitor 191, and the hold capacitor 191. Current is difficult to flow backward. That is, the charging voltage of the hold capacitor 191 is difficult to decrease. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an error between the hold value of the sound signal held by the peak hold unit 182 and the actual peak value of the sound signal.

  The switch unit 212 of the reset unit 183 is a switching unit provided at the connection part between the hold capacitor 191 and the discharge unit 211 instead of the changeover switch 214 provided at the connection part between the hold capacitor 191, the discharge unit 211 and the comparator 202. A switch 222 is provided. The changeover switch 222 can block the path connecting the hold capacitor 191 and the discharge unit 211, but does not block the path connecting the hold capacitor 191 and the comparator 202. That is, the hold capacitor 191 and the comparator 202 are in a conductive state regardless of the state of the changeover switch 222.

  When the switch unit 212 is in an OFF state because no current flows through the relay coil 215, the hold capacitor 191 is charged and the charge voltage is input to the comparator 202 as a hold value. On the other hand, when the switch unit 212 is in an ON state due to a current flowing through the relay coil 215, the discharge capacitor 211 discharges the hold capacitor 191 and charges the hold capacitor 191 even during the discharge. The voltage is input to the comparator 202. Even in this case, the peak value of the sound signal can be compared with the reference level by the comparator 202 as the hold value of the peak hold unit 182 except when the hold capacitor 191 is being discharged.

  The voltage generation unit 201 is provided with a Zener diode 223 instead of the shunt regulator 203. The Zener diode 223 is disposed in the reverse direction with respect to the + V terminal 208, and the cathode of the Zener diode 223 is connected to the + V terminal 208 via a series resistor R0. Further, the positive input terminal of the comparator 202 is connected between the series resistor R 0 and the Zener diode 223. In this case, the reverse voltage of the Zener diode 223 is set as the reference voltage Va, and thereby the reference voltage Va is held at a predetermined voltage value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation knob 112 is not provided for the voltage generator 201, and work such as replacing the Zener diode 223 is required to change the reference voltage Va. In this case, it is preferable to select the Zener diode 223 according to the reverse voltage so that the voltage value of the reference voltage Va becomes a value according to the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101. As a result, the voltage value of the reference voltage Va becomes larger than the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101, and the sound volume level of the sound data is smaller than the reference level (reference voltage Va). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of sound cracking in the output sound.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the voltage generation unit 201 of the sound crack detection circuit 175, since the reference voltage Va is a constant voltage by the Zener diode 223, the reference level can be suppressed from increasing or decreasing due to power supply voltage fluctuation. Moreover, since the reference voltage Va is regulated by the reverse voltage of the Zener diode 223, the configuration is simplified compared to a configuration in which the reference voltage Va is determined by a voltage dividing resistor provided for the shunt regulator 203, for example. be able to.

  In a configuration in which the discharge unit 211 is cut off from the hold capacitor 191 by the changeover switch 214, the hold capacitor 191 and the comparator 202 are not cut off, so that the hold capacitor 191 always outputs the charging voltage to the comparator 202. Can do.

  Since the FET 221 that regulates the discharge from the hold capacitor 191 is connected to the hold capacitor 191 as a rectifying element, the generation of leakage current in the rectifying element can be minimized. That is, it is possible to suppress the hold value from changing due to the natural discharge in the hold capacitor 191.

<Third Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when the volume restriction is released in the production sound volume restriction release process (step S1716), the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is returned to the maximum value (steps S1905, S1907, S1912). In the third embodiment, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is gradually brought closer to the maximum value in a stepwise manner.

  Here, the third embodiment will be described with a focus on differences from the first embodiment. First, the guidance sound volume restriction release process executed in step S1716 of the effect sound volume setting process (FIG. 34) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the effect sound volume setting process, first, in step S1913, it is determined whether or not a release flag is set. The release flag is a flag set in various flag storage areas of the RWM 145, and indicates that the release of the volume restriction is permitted by being set.

  When the release flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1901, and as described in the first embodiment, the processes after step S1901 are executed. However, in the second embodiment, processing for setting a release flag (steps S1915 to S1917) is executed instead of the processing for releasing the volume restriction (steps S1905, S1907, and S1912). In this case, at the timing when the amplification factor is instantaneously changed in the first embodiment, a release flag indicating that the change of the amplification factor is permitted is set without changing the amplification factor instantaneously.

  If the release flag is set, the process advances to step S1914 to execute the volume restriction stage release process on the assumption that the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is changed in stages. The volume restriction stage release process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the volume restriction stage release process, it is determined in step S2001 whether or not the amplification factor holding timer counter Tc is set. The amplification factor holding timer counter Tc is a timer counter that is set in each counter storage area of the RWM 145 in correspondence with each of the speakers 91 and 101 whose volume is restricted, and is 1 when the volume restriction is released in stages. This is for measuring the period during which the amplification factor is held at each stage.

  If there is a speaker whose volume is restricted but the amplification factor holding timer counter Tc corresponding to the speaker is set, the process proceeds to step S2002, and the amplification factor holding timer is associated with the speaker whose volume is restricted. The counter Tc is set to zero. By setting the amplification factor holding timer counter Tc, measurement of the duration during which the current amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is held is started.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, or after the processing of step S2002 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2003, and the amplification factor holding timer counter Tc is incremented by 1 (Tc = Tc + 1) for the volume-limited speaker. That is, for a speaker whose volume is limited, the duration of the current amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is measured by the amplification factor holding timer counter Tc. Here, when a plurality of amplification factor holding timer counters Tc are set, all the amplification factor holding timer counters Tc are incremented by one. As a result, when there are a plurality of speakers whose volume is restricted, the duration in which the amplification factor is held for all of the speakers is individually measured.

  In step S2004, for the speaker whose volume is limited, whether or not the gain is changed by determining whether or not the holding period of the gain continues beyond a predetermined release determination period (for example, 100 msec). Determine whether or not. Here, a predetermined value Nc (for example, 50) corresponding to the release determination period is set in advance, it is determined whether the amplification factor holding timer counter Tc is larger than the predetermined value Nc (Tc> Nc), and Tc> In the case of Nc, it is assumed that the amplification factor retention period exceeds the release determination period. In other words, it is assumed that the change of the amplification factor is permitted.

  When there are a plurality of speakers whose volume is restricted, it is determined whether or not Tc> Nc for each amplification factor holding timer counter Tc set corresponding to each speaker, and Tc> If there is at least one speaker whose volume is determined to be Nc, it is determined that there is at least one speaker that is permitted to change the amplification factor, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2004.

  If there is a speaker whose amplification factor is to be changed, the actual amplification factor of the speaker is acquired in step S2005, and the amplification of the amplifier 171 is performed in accordance with the position of the volume switch 111 being on the scale F in step S2006. The maximum value of the rate is acquired as the target gain. Note that the target amplification factor may be a value corresponding to the scale 5 or a value of 120% of the maximum value. The same applies to the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 set when the volume restriction is released in the first embodiment.

  In step S2007, the difference between the actual amplification factor and the target amplification factor is calculated, and it is determined whether the difference is smaller than a predetermined rate K (for example, 5%). Here, it is determined whether or not the absolute value of the value obtained by subtracting the target amplification factor from the actual amplification factor is smaller than the predetermined rate K.

  When the difference between the actual amplification factor and the target amplification factor is smaller than the predetermined rate K, the process proceeds to step S2008, and for the speaker for which the change of the amplification factor is permitted, the amplifier is set so that the actual amplification factor matches the target amplification factor. The amplification factor of 171 is changed.

  In step S2009, the gain holding timer counter Tc is cleared on the assumption that the gain has been changed for the speaker whose gain is allowed to be changed. With this process, for the speaker whose amplification factor has been changed, the measurement of the duration in which the amplification factor is held ends. In step S2010, regarding the speaker for which the change of the amplification factor is permitted, the release flag set corresponding to the speaker is cleared, assuming that the release of the volume restriction for the purpose of eliminating sound cracking is completed.

  If the difference between the actual gain and the target gain is not smaller than the predetermined rate K, the process proceeds to step S2011 to determine whether or not the actual gain is larger than the target gain. When the actual amplification factor is larger than the target amplification factor, the process proceeds to step S2012, and the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is reduced by a predetermined factor K for the speaker for which the change of the amplification factor is permitted. As a result, with respect to the speaker for which the change of the amplification factor is permitted, the actual amplification factor is changed to a side closer to the target amplification factor by one level.

  In step S2013, the gain holding timer counter Tc is cleared in the same manner as in step S2009, assuming that the gain has been changed by only one level for the speaker whose gain is allowed to be changed. In step S2014, it is determined whether or not the actual amplification factor and the target amplification factor have the same value for the speaker whose amplification factor has been changed in the immediately preceding step S2013. When the actual amplification factor and the target amplification factor are the same value, regarding the speaker whose amplification factor has been changed in the immediately preceding step S2013, it is assumed that the release of the volume restriction for the purpose of eliminating sound cracking has been completed. Clear the corresponding release flag.

  On the other hand, if the actual amplification factor and the target amplification factor are not the same for the speaker whose amplification factor has been changed in the immediately preceding step S2013, the volume restriction stage cancellation process is terminated as it is. For this speaker, since the release of the volume restriction has not ended, the amplification factor is changed again by repeatedly executing the volume restriction stage release process. In this case, the amplification factor is decreased step by step, and the cancellation of the volume restriction ends at a timing when the actual amplification factor and the target amplification factor coincide with each other.

  When the actual amplification factor is smaller than the target amplification factor, the process proceeds to step S2015, and the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is increased by a predetermined factor K for the speaker that is allowed to change the amplification factor. As a result, with respect to the speaker for which the change of the amplification factor is permitted, the actual amplification factor is changed to a side closer to the target amplification factor by one level. Thereafter, similarly to the case where the actual amplification factor is larger than the target amplification factor, the processes of steps S2013, S2014, and S2010 are performed. By repeatedly executing the canceling process, the amplification factor is increased stepwise, and the cancellation of the volume restriction ends at a timing when the actual amplification factor and the target amplification factor coincide with each other.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When the volume restriction is released for the purpose of eliminating sound cracks in the production sound, when the volume restriction is released, the release is gradually performed in multiple stages. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in volume. Moreover, since the change mode of the amplification factor when canceling the volume restriction is the same as the change mode of the amplification factor when performing the volume restriction in order to eliminate sound cracking, the volume restriction of the production sound is limited. Compared to a configuration in which the change mode of the output sound volume is different between the case of executing and the case of canceling, a sense of incongruity is less likely to occur with respect to a change in sound volume of the effect sound.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different modes may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations of the above embodiments.

  (A1) In the first embodiment, the changeover switch 214 is provided at the connection portion between the hold capacitor 191, the discharge unit 211, and the comparator 202. However, the connection path between the hold capacitor 191 and the discharge unit 211, the hold A changeover switch 214 may be provided in each of the connection paths between the capacitor 191 and the comparator 202. Even in this case, it is possible to switch off the hold capacitor 191 and the comparator 202 when the connection target of the hold capacitor 191 is the discharge unit 211 by the changeover switches 214 as the switching unit.

  In addition, the changeover switch 214 as a changeover unit may not be connected to the hold capacitor 191. In this case, since the hold capacitor 191 is always in conduction with the discharge unit 211, the peak value of the sound signal becomes difficult to be held when the hold capacitor 191 is discharged, but the peak value of the sound signal is changed from the hold capacitor 191 to the comparator. The configuration is output to 202.

  (A2) In each of the above-described embodiments, the state of the changeover switch 214 is switched at a predetermined cycle by a transmission signal from the oscillation circuit 217, but the state of the changeover switch 214 may be switched at an arbitrary timing. . For example, a switching signal is output from the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72, and the state of the switch 214 is switched according to the switching signal.

  In this configuration, the sub MPU 142 performs a reset process for resetting the hold value of the peak hold unit 182 in the volume setting process (the process of step S1109 of the notification and effect control process). In the reset process, an ON signal is output to the relay coil 215 as a switching signal, and the switch unit 212 is shifted to the ON state so that the hold capacitor 191 is discharged. The ON signal is a signal that keeps the switch unit 212 in an ON state for a predetermined discharge period (for example, 0.6 msec), whereby the hold capacitor 191 is continuously discharged for the discharge period. For this reason, the charge voltage of the hold capacitor 191 can be surely made zero by discharging. In addition, the discharge period is shorter than the execution period (for example, 2 msec) of the notification and effect control process.

  In the volume setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42, the sub MPU 142 executes the amplifier amplification factor setting process (the process in step S1403) and then resets in step S1409 if the output sound is a guide sound among the notification sounds. Process. If the output sound is a fraudulent sound among the notification sounds, the guidance sound volume setting process (the process of step S1404) is executed, and then the reset process is performed in step S1410. Furthermore, if the output sound is a production sound, after performing the production sound volume setting process (the process of step S1408), a reset process is performed in step S1411.

  For example, the case where the reset process is performed in step S1410 after the guidance sound volume setting process will be described. The reset process is executed after the sound breaking determination is performed in step S1503 of the guidance sound volume setting process. Become. For this reason, as in the first embodiment, when the occurrence of sound cracking is detected by the sound crack detection circuit 175, the sub MPU 142 reliably receives the sound crack signal output from the sound crack detection circuit 175. It becomes possible to do. Thereby, the determination accuracy of sound crack determination can be improved.

  The same effect as described above can also be obtained when the reset process is performed in step S1411 after the effect sound volume setting process.

  (A3) In each of the above embodiments, the reset value of the hold value of the peak hold unit 182 by the reset unit 183 is performed at the same cycle as the processing cycle of the notification and effect control processing executed by the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72. However, it may be performed with a longer period and a shorter period than the processing period of the notification and effect control process. For example, the reset period by the reset unit 183 (oscillation circuit 217) may be 1 second or 1 minute. Even in this case, the sound cracking continues by setting the sound cracking continuation determination period for performing the determination process (steps S1507, S1708) for determining whether or not the sound cracking continues to be longer than the reset period. Can be determined.

  (A4) In each of the above embodiments, the comparator 184 compares the sound signal hold value and the reference level by the comparator 202. However, the comparator 202 may compare the sound signal hold value and the reference level. Even in this case, the comparison unit 184 can detect that the hold value of the sound signal exceeds the reference level.

  (A5) In the first embodiment, the voltage value (reference level) of the reference voltage Va input to the comparator 202 is variably set by the voltage generator 201. The voltage generation unit 201 that is electrically connected to the comparator 202 may be switched by a switch unit. Even in this configuration, if the reference voltage Va generated by each voltage generation unit 201 is set to a different voltage value, the voltage value of the reference voltage Va input to the comparator 202 can be switched. Thereby, the reference level input to the comparator 202 can be variably set.

  (A6) In each of the above embodiments, the LOW level signal output from the comparator 202 of the sound break detection circuit 175 is the sound break signal, but the HI level signal may be the sound break signal. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which a sound signal is input to the + input terminal of the comparator 202 and the reference voltage Va (reference level) is input to the − input terminal. In short, the sound breaking detection circuit 175 may output a sound breaking signal to the sound light control device 72 when the occurrence of sound breaking is detected.

  (A7) In each of the above embodiments, the peak value on the positive side of the sound signal is set as the hold value by the peak hold unit 182; however, the peak value on the negative side of the sound signal may be set as the hold value. For example, a rectifier element such as a diode 192 is connected in the reverse direction to the hold capacitor 191 in the peak hold unit 182. In this configuration, a negative reference voltage Va is generated by the voltage generation unit 201, and a negative hold value and a negative reference voltage Va (reference level) are input to the comparator 202. Even in this case, the comparator 202 can detect that the absolute value of the hold value exceeds the absolute value of the reference level. In other words, the sound break detection circuit 175 can detect the sound break occurrence at the speakers 91 and 101.

  (A8) In each of the above embodiments, the buffer unit 193 is provided in the peak hold unit 182, but the buffer unit 193 may not be provided. That is, the operational amplifier 194 and the feedback path 195 may not be provided. Even in this case, in the first embodiment, in the range where the volume level of the sound signal is larger than the forward voltage of the diode 192, the peak value of the sound signal can be held by the charge voltage of the hold capacitor 191.

  (A9) In the first embodiment, the voltage generation unit 201 includes the shunt regulator 203. However, the voltage generation unit 201 may include a series regulator that includes a transistor. Even in this case, the reference voltage Va can be held at a predetermined voltage value.

  (A10) In the first embodiment, the first resistor R1 of the first resistor R1 and the second resistor R2 connected to the shunt regulator 203 is a fixed resistor. Both of the two resistors R2 may be fixed resistors. Even in this case, the voltage generator 201 can maintain the reference voltage Va at a predetermined voltage value.

  (A11) In the second embodiment, the voltage value of the reference voltage Va in the voltage generation unit 201 may be adjustable. For example, a plurality of zener diodes 223 having different reverse voltages are arranged in parallel, and a switching unit that can individually switch each zener diode 223 to a conductive state or a cut-off state with respect to the comparator 202 is provided. . According to this configuration, the reverse voltage (reference voltage Va) of the Zener diode 223 input to the comparator 202 is changed by switching the Zener diode 223 that is in conduction with the comparator 202. That is, the reference level can be variably set.

  (A12) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the occurrence of sound breakage is detected by the sound breakage detection circuit 175, the volume restriction process for reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 as a process for reducing the volume level of the sound signal Is performed by the sub-MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72. As a process for reducing the volume level of the sound signal, a notification process for notifying that sound cracking has occurred and an output of the sound signal from the amplifier 171. May be performed, a process of outputting a signal indicating the occurrence of sound cracking to the management computer, a process of stopping the release of the game ball from the game ball launching mechanism 51, and the like.

  For example, a notification sound for notifying that sound cracking has occurred is output from the speakers 91 and 101. In this case, the hall manager can know from the notification sound that the sound breakage has occurred in the speakers 91 and 101, thereby reducing the volume of the sound from the pachinko machine 10 that is the notification source. It is possible to work to solve the problem. It is considered that players are more likely to endure and play without informing the hall manager even if sound breaks occur, so notifying sound breaks is effective in eliminating sound breaks. Is.

  (A13) In each of the above embodiments, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 can be reduced in a plurality of stages. However, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 may be reduced by one stage. For example, when it is determined in steps S1501 and S1701 that the volume of the speakers 91 and 101 is restricted, the volume restriction process is not executed. However, in this configuration, if the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is reduced by only one step, the amount of decrease in the amplification factor is insufficient, and the volume level of the sound signal does not fall below the reference level (the sound cracking has been eliminated). Not). For this reason, it is preferable to set the reduction amount of the amplification factor to a sufficiently large value. Incidentally, the reduction amount of the amplification factor may be set so that the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 becomes 0%.

  (A14) In each of the above embodiments, when the occurrence of sound breakage is detected by the sound breakage detection circuit 175, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is decreased by one step. It may be made smaller. That is, the amplification factor may be decreased by a plurality of stages in one volume restriction process (the processes in steps S1508 and S1710). For example, in the case where only one speaker among the speakers 91 and 101 is generating sound cracking, the amplification factor is reduced by one step in one volume limiting process, and sound cracking is occurring. In the case where there are a plurality of speakers, the amplification factor is reduced by a plurality of levels in one volume limiting process. Further, when the amplification factor is decreased step by step, the reduction rate of the amplification factor at each step may not be the same.

  (A15) In each of the above embodiments, in the volume limiting process, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to be reduced by a predetermined ratio with respect to the rated output of the power unit 173. However, the amplification factor that is set each time is set. However, it may be configured to be reduced by a predetermined ratio. Further, the peak value of the volume level of the sound signal may be reduced by a predetermined value (for example, several dB).

  (A16) In each of the above embodiments, even if the sound cracking detection circuit 175 detects the sound cracking, the duration of the sound cracking does not exceed the sound cracking continuation determination period (steps S1507 and S1708 are NO). In the case), the sound volume restriction process is not performed. However, if sound breakage is detected, the sound volume restriction process may be performed even if sound breakup is not continued. According to this configuration, when sound cracking occurs, the sound cracking can be quickly eliminated.

  In addition, in a configuration where volume restriction is performed even if sound cracking does not continue, if sound cracking is detected even after the amplification factor is reduced, a waiting period is required until the amplification factor is reduced next. Will not be secured. Even in this case, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is gradually reduced.

  Incidentally, even if a standby period is secured after the volume restriction process is executed and before the next volume restriction process is executed, the standby period may not be used as the sound cracking continuation determination period. That is, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the duration of sound cracking has exceeded the sound cracking continuation judgment period.

  Even when the standby period is used as the sound crack continuation determination period, the standby period and the sound crack continuation determination period may be set to different lengths. For example, the standby period is set as a period longer than the sound cracking continuation determination period.

  (A17) In each of the embodiments described above, the condition for performing the volume restriction process includes that sound cracking continues beyond the sound cracking continuation determination period (when steps S1507 and S1708 are YES determinations). However, it may be included that sound crack detection by the sound crack detection circuit 175 has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more during the sound crack continuation determination period. That is, the volume restriction process may be executed when sound cracking occurs intermittently.

  (B1) In each of the above embodiments, the upper speaker 91 is provided on the front door frame 14 and the lower speaker 101 is provided on the outer frame 11, but at least one speaker serves as the sound output means. As long as it is provided. Even in this case, it is possible to realize a configuration in which a speaker as sound output means is provided on the front body of the gaming machine, and a common ROM 147 as storage means for storing sound data is provided in the inner frame 13 as the gaming machine body. The position where the sound output means is provided may be arbitrarily set, and may be the central portion of the front door frame 14 or the like.

  In the configuration in which at least one sound output means is provided in the front door frame 14, it is preferable that at least one sound output means is provided in the outer frame 11. Thereby, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the sound output means is provided in the game machine front body and the outer frame, and the storage means is provided in the game machine main body.

  (B2) In each of the above embodiments, the sound light control device 72 having the common ROM 147 as the storage means is provided in the inner frame 13, but the sound light control device 72 is provided in the back pack unit 15. Also good. In this case, if the backpack unit 15 is included in the gaming machine main body together with the inner frame 13, the common ROM 147 is provided in the gaming machine main body. Further, the common ROM 147 may be provided in the main control device 71, the payout control device 78, the power and launch control device 79, the display control device 128, etc., instead of the sound light control device 72. In either case, the storage means is provided in the gaming machine main body.

  Similar to the common ROM 147, the amplifier 171 as the amplification means and the sound crack detection circuit 175 as the level excess detection means are not the sound light control device 72 but the main control device 71, the payout control device 78, the power source and the launch control. It may be provided in the device 79, the display control device 128, or the like. In either case, the amplification means and the level excess detection means are provided in the gaming machine body. Further, the installation target of the amplification means and the level excess detection means may be different from the installation target of the storage means.

  (B3) In each of the above embodiments, the sound data is stored in the common ROM 147 in the sound light control device 72, but the sound data may be stored in the direct ROM 144. The sound data may be stored in the ROM 123 of the main controller 71.

  (B4) In each of the above embodiments, the operation knob 112 is disposed at a position that does not overlap the switch opening 113 of the backpack unit 15, but the operation knob 112 is disposed at a position that overlaps the switch opening 113. May be. In this case, the hall manager or the like does not rotate the back pack unit 15 with respect to the inner frame 13, but performs the easy operation of opening the switch lid 114 so that the operation knob 112 is attached to the back side of the pachinko machine. Can be exposed. For this reason, the preparatory work at the time of operating the operation knob 112 can be facilitated.

  The back pack unit 15 may not be provided with the switch opening 113. In this case, it is necessary to open the back pack unit 15 with respect to the inner frame 13 in order to operate both the volume switch 111 and the operation knob 112.

  (B5) In each of the embodiments described above, the operation knob 112 that can change the reference level of the sound crack detection circuit 175 is provided on the back side of the inner frame 13, but the operation knob 112 is provided on the front side of the inner frame 13. It may be provided in the back pack unit 15 or the front door frame 14. Further, the operation knob 112 may be provided in the main control device 71, the payout control device 78, the power and launch control device 79, the display control device 128, etc. instead of the sound light control device 72. In any case, a configuration in which the hall manager can operate the operation knob 112 can be realized. Further, if the operation knob 112 is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, not only the hall manager but also the player can operate the operation knob 112.

  (B6) When the volume restriction is performed for the purpose of eliminating the occurrence of sound cracking in the speakers 91 and 101, the volume restriction may be continued until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. It may always be continued for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) regardless of the type of output sound and the gaming state. In any case, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the volume restriction is released in accordance with a predetermined timing.

  (B7) In each of the above-described embodiments, even when the volume is restricted for the purpose of eliminating sound cracking, sound cracking determination as to whether or not sound cracking has occurred in the speakers 91 and 101 (steps S1503 and S1703). However, if the sound volume is restricted, the sound cracking determination may not be performed. Further, when the sound volume restriction is performed, a sound break signal may not be input from the sound break detection circuit 175 to the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72 even if sound break occurs.

  (B8) In each of the above embodiments, the sound volume is always limited for the purpose of eliminating the sound cracking when the sound breaking occurs in the guidance sound output from the speakers 91 and 101. The volume may be limited according to the content of the sound, or the volume may not be limited for the guidance sound. In a configuration that does not limit the volume, it is possible to output the guidance sound at a high volume even if sound breaks up, making it easier for players and hall managers to recognize that the guidance sound is being output. .

  (B9) In each of the above embodiments, when the volume restriction is performed for the purpose of eliminating the cracking of the production sound, the volume restriction is released in accordance with the timing when the variable display ends. If the restriction is not in the variable display but in the normal game state or the special game state, the volume restriction may be released in accordance with the timing at which the normal game state or the special game state ends.

  (C1) A plurality of sound output means such as the speakers 91 and 101 may be provided in any part of the pachinko machine 10. For example, all the speakers 91 and 101 may be provided on the front door frame 14, and the speakers 91 and 101 may be provided on the outer frame 11, the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14, respectively.

  (C2) In each of the above embodiments, the speakers 91 and 101 are individually connected to the amplifier 171 via the speaker paths 135. However, the speakers 91 and 101 are one speaker branched into a plurality. The amplifiers 171 may be connected together by the path 135. In this case, the sound signal output from the amplifier 171 is input to the speakers 91 and 101 together. However, even in this case, if the allowable input levels of the speakers 91 and 101 are different from each other due to tolerances, sound cracking occurs even if the volume levels of the sound signals input to the speakers 91 and 101 are the same. Speakers and non-generated speakers are mixed. Therefore, it is preferable to detect the occurrence of sound cracking in the speakers 91 and 101 by the sound crack detection circuit 175 in order to eliminate the occurrence of sound cracking in the speakers 91 and 101.

  (C3) In each of the above embodiments, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 can be set individually for each of the speakers 91 and 101. However, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is summarized for each of the speakers 91 and 101. It is good also as a structure set up. Even in this case, when sound cracking occurs in at least one of the speakers 91 and 101, the sound cracking is caused for the speakers in which sound cracking occurs by reducing the amplification factor for all the speakers 91 and 101. Can be eliminated.

  (C4) In each of the above embodiments, the sound crack detection circuit 175 is provided for each of the speakers 91 and 101. However, the sound crack detection circuit 175 is one for each speaker 91 and 101. Only one may be provided. For example, each branch path 176 branched from each speaker path 135 is collectively connected to one sound crack detection circuit 175. Even with this configuration, it is possible for the sound crack detection circuit 175 to detect that sound cracks have occurred in at least one of the speakers 91 and 101.

  (C5) In each of the above embodiments, the reference level can be variably set in each sound crack detection circuit 175, but the reference level may be a fixed value. Further, the reference level may be set to the same value in all sound crack detection circuits 175. In this case, even if the allowable input levels of the speakers 91 and 101 are different from each other due to an intersection or the like, if the reference level is set in accordance with the allowable input level, the sound is broken in the speakers 91 and 101. Alternatively, the sound crack detection circuit 175 can detect that the volume level of the sound signal is close to the allowable input level.

  (C6) In each of the above embodiments, when sound cracking occurs in any of the speakers 91 and 101, the processing of the amplifier 171 is performed as a process for reducing the volume level of the sound signal for that speaker. The volume limiting process for reducing the amplification factor is performed by the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72. As a process for reducing the volume level of the sound signal, sound breakage occurs in any of the speakers 91 and 101. An informing process for informing whether the sound is present or a process for stopping output of sound from a speaker in which sound is broken may be performed.

  (C7) In each of the above embodiments, the ratio of the number of steps for lowering the amplification factor for speakers with sound cracking to the number of steps for lowering amplification factor for speakers with no sound cracking is 1: 2. However, this ratio may be set arbitrarily. However, it is preferable that the number of steps for lowering the amplification factor for a speaker without sound cracking be smaller than the number of steps for lowering the amplification factor for a speaker with sound cracking. Further, the volume restriction for the speaker in which sound breakage does not occur may be performed in the same manner as the volume restriction for the speaker in which sound breakage described in (a12) to (a14).

  (C8) In each of the above embodiments, both the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101 are connected to a speaker in which sound cracking has not occurred in either of the speakers 91 and 101. If included (when the volume harmony processing is performed in step S1715), the lower volume of the output volume of the upper speaker 91 may be larger than that of the lower speaker 101 for the speakers 91 and 101. However, the lower volume of the output volume of the lower speaker 101 may be larger than that of the upper speaker 91. Further, the lowering volume of the output volume may always be the same between the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101.

  Also, each upper speaker 91 is not a grouping (grouping) in which each upper speaker 91 is one group and each lower speaker 101 is one group. For example, the right speakers 91, 101 are one group and the left speaker 91. , 101 may be grouped as one group, and the output volume may be reduced differently between the right speaker and the left speaker where no sound cracking occurs. The speakers 91 and 101 may not be grouped according to the arrangement, but may be grouped according to the type of output sound and the pitch (frequency band) of the sound.

  (C9) In each of the above embodiments, when the output sound from the speakers 91 and 101 is a production sound, the sound volume adjustment process (the process of step S1715) is executed. This may be executed when the sound is a notification sound such as a fraud sound or a guidance sound. For example, when the output sound is a guide sound, if sound cracking occurs in at least one of the speakers 91 and 101, the speaker in which sound cracking has occurred is identified and the identified speaker is targeted. The sound volume is restricted, and the sound volume is restricted even for a speaker in which no sound is broken according to the number of steps of the sound volume restriction.

  (C10) In each of the above embodiments, the middle speaker is output from the upper speaker 91 and the bass is output from the lower speaker 101. However, the bass is output from the upper speaker 91 and the middle speaker is output from the lower speaker 101. It is good also as a structure from which a high sound is output. Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which both the middle high sound and a low sound are output from each of the upper side speaker 91 and the lower side speaker 101. FIG.

  (D1) In each of the above embodiments, the volume switch 111 can be exposed to the rear of the gaming machine through the switch opening 113 provided in the backpack unit 15, but the switch opening 113 is provided. It does not have to be. Even in this case, by rotating the back pack unit 15 relative to the inner frame 13, the volume switch 111 can be exposed and operated toward the rear of the gaming machine.

  The volume switch 111 is provided on the back side of the inner frame 13, but may be provided on the front side of the inner frame 13, or may be provided on the back pack unit 15 or the inner frame 13. Further, the volume switch 111 may be provided in the main control device 71, the payout control device 78, the power and launch control device 79, the display control device 128, and the like instead of the sound light control device 72. In any case, a configuration in which the hall manager can operate the volume switch 111 can be realized. Further, if the volume switch 111 is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, not only the hall manager but also the player can operate the volume switch 111.

  (D2) In each of the above embodiments, the volume switch 111 selects the function for selecting whether or not to limit the volume for the purpose of eliminating sound cracks, and the output volume from the speakers 91 and 101 is assigned to the hall manager or the like. However, a dedicated switch having these functions individually may be provided. For example, the volume switch 111 has a volume adjustment function, and another dedicated switch has a selection function for eliminating sound cracking.

  In this configuration, the dedicated switch can be switched to a plurality of states, and the scale F is included in the position of the dedicated switch. In this case, even if the position of the dedicated switch is on the scale F, the position of the volume switch 111 can be switched to any one of the scales 0 to 5. In other words, even if the mode is set to eliminate the sound breakup caused by the output sound by the dedicated switch, the output volume in that mode can be variably set by the volume switch 111.

  Further, the dedicated switch may be provided so that the player can operate on the front surface of the gaming machine. For example, a push button type dedicated switch is provided around the lower plate 62a. In this configuration, every time the dedicated switch is pressed, the mode is switched between a mode that eliminates sound cracking and a mode that does not eliminate sound cracking. As described above, when sound cracking occurs in the speakers 91 and 101, the sound cracking effect can be executed.

  (D3) In each of the above embodiments, whether or not a sound break signal is output from the sound break detection circuit 175 in the sound volume setting process of the sub MPU 142 when the output sound from the speakers 91 and 101 is a fraud sound. Although the sound crack determination for determining whether or not (the processing of steps S1503 and S1703) is not performed, the sound crack determination may be performed even if the output sound is a fraudulent sound. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which sound crack determination is performed when an output sound is made into a production sound and the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F.

  (D4) In each of the above embodiments, if the volume switch 111 is at the scale F and the output sound from the speakers 91 and 101 is a fraud sound, the fraud sound is temporarily broken. However, although the volume restriction is not performed for the purpose of eliminating the sound cracking, the output sound in which the volume restriction is not performed regardless of the position of the volume switch 111 may be a production sound or a guidance sound. In this case, with respect to the production sound and guidance sound, priority is given to maintaining the volume over eliminating cracking, and the production effect and guidance effect specific to the production sound and guidance sound can be achieved by reducing the volume. On the other hand, it is possible to suppress the situation that it decreases.

  (D5) In each of the above-described embodiments, even if the volume switch 111 is not on the scale F, if sound guidance is generated in the guidance sounds output from the speakers 91 and 101, the purpose is to eliminate sound cracking. Although the volume restriction is performed, the output sound for which the volume restriction is performed regardless of the position of the volume switch 111 may be a fraud sound or a production sound. In this case, priority is given to eliminating sound cracking rather than maintaining the volume for fraud sounds and performance sounds. By maintaining the volume, fraud alert effects and effects specific to fraud sounds and performance sounds are maintained. The situation where an effect falls rather than it can be suppressed.

  (D6) In each of the above embodiments, the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplifier 171 when the fraud sound is output from the speakers 91 and 101 is always set to the maximum value (rated output of the amplifier 171). In this case, the amplification factor may be set to a value corresponding to the position of the volume switch 111. In this configuration, the fraudulent sound is output at a volume corresponding to the position of the volume switch 111.

  (D7) In each of the above embodiments, when the volume switch 111 is at the scale F and the sound output from the speakers 91 and 101 is not broken, the amplification factor of the sound signal at the amplifier 171 is as follows. Although the maximum value is always set, the amplification factor in this case may be set to a value smaller than the maximum value. Note that the amplification factor in this case may be selected by a dedicated operation switch different from the volume switch 111.

  (D8) In each of the above embodiments, the sound for notifying the payout abnormality acquired by the payout control device 78 is the guide sound output from the speakers 91 and 101. The sound for notifying abnormality relating to the launch of the game ball acquired in 79 may be a guide sound. In short, it is only necessary that a sound for notifying an abnormality occurring in the pachinko machine 10 is a guide sound.

  (D9) Examples of fraudulent sounds output from the speakers 91 and 101 include a sound for notifying that the front door frame 14 has been illegally opened and a sound indicating that the locking device 16 has been illegally unlocked. Can be mentioned. In short, it is only necessary that the sound for notifying the pachinko machine 10 that fraud has been performed is the fraud occurrence sound.

  (D10) In each of the above embodiments, when one of the effect sound and the notification sound is output from the speakers 91 and 101, the other is not output, but the effect sound and the notification sound are output simultaneously. It is good also as composition to do. For example, if the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F and the output sound from the speakers 91 and 101 includes fraudulent sound and effect sound as notification sound, sound breakup occurs in the output sound. Even so, the volume is not limited. In this case, priority is given to the maintenance of the sound volume for the fraudulent sound rather than the sound crack elimination for the effect sound.

  (D11) In each of the above embodiments, the sound volume control processing for setting the output sound volume from the speakers 91 and 101 is executed by the sound light control device 72, but the sound volume setting processing is performed by the main control device 71 and the display. It may be executed by the control device 128. Even in this case, it is possible to suitably eliminate the sound cracking generated in the output sound. In this case, it is preferable that the amplifier 171 and the sound crack detection circuit 175 are mounted on a control device that executes a volume setting process.

  (E1) In each of the above embodiments, the sound breaking effect can be executed when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F. However, the sound breaking effect may be executable regardless of the position of the volume switch 111. .

  (E2) In each of the above embodiments, the sound cracking effect can be executed when the variation display mode on the symbol display device 41 is one of the super reach A to C. If it is, or if it is completely out of place, the sound splitting effect may be executable. In any case, it is possible to increase the player's expectation with respect to the result of stopping the variable display.

  (E3) In each of the above embodiments, the sound-breaking effect can be executed when the game is being played, that is, when the symbol display is performed on the symbol display device 41. The sound cracking effect may be executable when the change display is not performed. For example, the sound cracking effect may be executable when the pachinko machine 10 is in the opening / closing execution mode (special game state) or when the winning / raising lottery mode is in the high probability mode. In any case, since the state where the possibility that a privilege is given to the player is high and the state where it is not high are differentiated by the sound cracking effect, the expectation for the privilege grant can be increased by the sound cracking effect.

  (E4) In each of the embodiments described above, when the sound split effect is performed, the length of the effect sound split period in which the volume is not limited and the effect limit period in which the volume is limited are the same. However, the lengths of these periods may be different. In addition, when sound splitting has occurred in the production sound, the sound cracking production was performed by repeatedly executing and releasing the volume restriction, but the sound cracking period for production was made almost the same length as the variable display period. It is good also as a sound crack production | presentation to set and to generate a sound crack continuously until a fluctuation | variation display is complete | finished. Furthermore, the sound breaking effect may have a volume restriction mode, and the degree of expectation for the change display stop result may differ depending on which sound cracking effect is executed.

  (E5) In each of the above embodiments, the total of the effect sound splitting period and the effect limiting period is set to be smaller than ½ of the required period required for one variation display. And the production limit period may be arbitrarily set, and may be smaller than ¼ of the required period.

  (E6) In the third embodiment, when the volume is restricted for the purpose of eliminating the cracking of the production sound, the volume restriction can be released in a plurality of stages. Performing the release in a plurality of stages may be applied when the volume is restricted for the purpose of eliminating cracks in the notification sound such as the guide sound. As a result, when the volume restriction for the notification sound is released, it is difficult for the user to feel uncomfortable with respect to the volume change of the notification sound.

  (F1) In each of the above embodiments, the sound crack detection circuit 175 is connected to the branch path 176 branched from the speaker path 135 in the configuration in which the amplifier 171 and the speakers 91 and 101 are connected by the speaker path 135. The sound crack detection circuit 175 may be connected to the amplifier 171 via another path independent of the speaker path 135.

  In this case, the timing at which the sound signal is output from the amplifier 171 to the speakers 91 and 101 and the timing at which the sound signal is output to the sound crack detection circuit 175 can be made different. For example, a predetermined time lag is ensured from when the sound signal is output to the sound crack detection circuit 175 to when the sound signal is output to the speakers 91 and 101. In this configuration, when the sound crack detection circuit 175 detects that the volume level of the sound signal exceeds the reference level, the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplifier 171 is limited, and the limited sound signal is limited. Can be output to the speakers 91 and 101. Thus, unlike the configuration in which the sound signal is simultaneously output to the sound break detection circuit 175 and the speakers 91 and 101, the speakers 91 and 101 are simultaneously with the timing at which the sound break detection circuit 175 detects the occurrence of the sound break. It is possible to avoid a situation in which sound cracking occurs.

  (F2) In each of the above embodiments, a plurality of sound output means such as the speakers 91 and 101 are provided in the pachinko machine 10, but only one sound output means may be provided. The sound output means may be a headphone speaker that is worn on a human head. Further, the sound output means may be an output terminal that outputs a sound signal to a speaker such as a headphone speaker externally attached to the pachinko machine 10. In short, the sound output means may be any means for outputting sound at a volume corresponding to the volume level of the sound signal.

  (F3) In the above embodiment, in the lower speaker unit 100, the speaker housing 102 is a sealed enclosure, but may be a bass-reflex enclosure. For example, a bass reflex port is formed in the speaker housing 102 in addition to the speaker opening 105. In this configuration, in the internal space of the speaker housing 102, the lower speaker 101 is disposed at a position where the sound output portion is separated from the speaker opening 105. In this case, the sound output from the lower speaker 101 is propagated from the speaker opening 105 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the internal space of the speaker housing 102.

  (F4) A common memory that stores data in advance is used between a control unit that performs sound output control using sound data and a control unit that performs image display control using image data. It is good also as a structure to be made. For example, a common ROM may be used between the sound output LSI 146 and the VDP 163 provided as the drawing LSI. In this configuration, the ROM connected to the sound output LSI 146 may store at least part of the image data together with the sound data. Instead, the ROM connected to the VDP 163 stores the sound along with the image data. It is good also as a structure in which at least one part of data is memorize | stored. In this case, the sound output LSI 146 and the VDP 163 may be directly connected without via the subordinate MPUs 142 and 162, or may be connected via the subordinate MPUs 142 and 162.

  (F5) The common ROM 147 is directly connected to the sound output LSI 146 and is not directly connected to the sub MPU 142. Instead, the common ROM 147 is common to the bus connecting the sound output LSI 146 and the sub MPU 142. The configuration may be such that the ROM 147 is connected. In this case, it is preferable to separately provide a circuit for adjusting the access timing of the sound output LSI 146 and the sub MPU 142 so that the common ROM 147 is not accessed simultaneously.

  (F6) The sound source method in the sound output LSI 146 is not limited to that in the above embodiment, and for example, a waveform memory method, FM method, or AM method may be adopted.

  (F7) The configuration in which the sub MPU 142 accesses the register 152 of the sound output LSI 146 using the bus B1 is not limited to the configuration in the above embodiment. For example, even when any area of the register 152 is accessed, information may be transmitted in parallel using all the signal paths J1 to J8 of the bus B1.

  (F8) The sound data read from the common ROM 147 may be transferred to the sound data processing unit 153 instead of being transferred to the register 152. In this case, each timing is set so that the period in which the sound data is transferred from the common ROM 147 toward the sound output LSI 146 and the period in which the light emission data is transferred from the common ROM 147 toward the sound output LSI 146 do not overlap. The period during which the light emission data is transferred from the sound output LSI 146 to the sub MPU 142 may overlap with the period during which the sound data is transferred from the common ROM 147.

  In addition to the above configuration, the data after analyzing the sequence data and the parameter data is not stored in the register 152, but is stored in the sound data processing unit 153, and in response to an instruction from the sound data processing unit 153. Based on this, the data transfer unit 155 may transfer the sound data.

  (F9) The hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 are stored separately, and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 has priority. The structure digested may be applied, and conversely, the structure in which the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 is preferentially digested may be applied.

  Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operation ports are not arranged vertically, but the first operation port corresponding to the upper operation port 33 and the second operation port corresponding to the lower operation port 34 are arranged on the left and right. It is good also as a structure arranged in parallel, It is good also as a structure in which these both operation ports were arranged in parallel diagonally. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which arrange | positions both operation openings apart so that only the winning to the 1st operation opening or the winning to the 2nd operation opening can be aimed according to the operation mode of the launch handle 55.

  Further, in the above configuration, the main display unit 43 is acquired based on the first display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the hold information is acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 and the winning of the lower operating port 34. A second display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the held information is correct may be provided. In this case, the change display of the pattern in the first display area is based on whether or not the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. Is started and a stop result corresponding to the determination of the success / failure is displayed, and the change display for one game time is ended. In addition, the change display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area based on whether the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. At the same time, the stop result corresponding to the determination of success / failure is displayed, and the display of the variation of one game time is ended.

  (F10) In the case where the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 becomes a target of the determination of success / failure, and the case where the hold information related to winning in the lower operation port 34 becomes the target of the determination of success / failure, It is good also as a structure from which the profit which is obtained differs. In the configuration in which a plurality of operation ports are provided, the number of operation ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with only one working port.

  (F11) Display control based on a command output from the main control device 71 instead of a configuration in which the display control device 128 is controlled by the sound control device 72 based on a command output from the main control device 71 The device 128 may control the sound light control device 72. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound light control device 72 and the display control device 128 are separately provided, the two control devices may be provided as a single control device, and one of the two control devices has a function. May be integrated into the main controller 71, and both functions of these two controllers may be integrated into the main controller 71. The configuration of the command output from the main control device 71 to the sound control device 72 and the configuration of the command output from the sound control device 72 to the display control device 128 are also arbitrary.

  (F12) The device for executing the effect for game times is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and the effect for effect for game times is executed by operating a decorative member provided in a movable manner. It is also possible to have a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by a combination of all or a part of the above aspects. Good.

  (F13) In each of the above-described embodiments, one game turn in the main display unit 43 is started based on the determination of whether or not the main control device 71 has made a decision. However, the present invention is not limited to this. On the other hand, when the condition for determining whether or not the main control device 71 is determined is satisfied, the game times are started at a timing before the timing at which the determination is actually made, and the determination is made after that. It is good also as a structure by which the subsequent display mode, display continuation time, and stop result in the game time are determined. In this case, the main control device 71 first transmits a variation command when the game turn start timing is reached, and then determines whether or not the game is correct, determines the display duration, and determines the type. The configuration may be such that commands are transmitted, and the transmission timing of these time commands and type commands may be shifted.

  (F14) In each of the above embodiments, the main display unit 43 is configured to display a stop result corresponding to each game result. However, instead of this, the main display unit 43 may be omitted. Even if it is a game result, it is good also as a structure by which a common stop result is displayed on the main display part 43, and a stop result is displayed on the main display part 43 at random, and as a result from the display of the main display part 43 It is good also as a structure which cannot identify which game result it is.

  (F15) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.
<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
The invention of the following feature group A is effective for the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a speaker as sound output means, and the speaker outputs a variety of performance sounds according to the gaming state, so that the degree of attention to the game can be increased. In addition, since the output sound from the speaker is used as a notification sound, it is possible to notify the state of the gaming machine or notify the occurrence of fraud.

  The speaker outputs sound when a sound signal is input from the amplifier, and the sound volume output from the speaker is determined by setting the amplification factor of the sound signal by the amplifier. In a gaming machine in which the amplification factor of the amplifier is variably set, the output volume from the speaker can be changed according to the amplification factor of the amplifier. For example, in a gaming machine provided with a volume switch, the amplification factor of the amplifier is changed by operating the volume switch, and thereby the output volume from the speaker is changed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-320542). 2005-261808).

  However, when the volume level of the sound signal input to the speaker is higher than the allowable input level of the speaker, the sound output from the speaker may sound like a crack due to distortion of the waveform of the sound signal. In this case, the output sound that should enhance the gameability and convenience will give the player an unpleasant feeling.

  On the other hand, when the volume switch is operated so that the amplification factor of the amplifier becomes small, the volume level of the sound signal input to the speaker becomes small, and the sound cracking occurring in the speaker can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

  However, when a hall manager, a player, or the like operates the volume switch, the operation mode is not necessarily a mode suitable for sound cracking each time. For example, in a configuration in which the volume switch is arranged on the back side of the gaming machine, the amplifier is so large that the hall manager does not break the sound outside the business hall opening hours (for example, before opening, after closing, or on a regular holiday). Although it is assumed that the volume switch is operated so that the amplification factor of the sound becomes small, this does not eliminate the sound cracking in accordance with the timing at which the sound cracking actually occurs. In addition, in the configuration in which the volume switch is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, it becomes possible for the player to operate the volume switch during the game, but it is not necessary to operate the volume switch every time a sound break occurs. The operation frequency of the volume switch increases, which is not realistic for the player.

Feature A1. Amplifying means (amplifier 171) for amplifying the sound signal;
Sound output means (upper speaker 91, lower speaker 101) for outputting sound at a volume corresponding to the volume level of the sound signal by inputting the sound signal amplified by the amplification means;
With
The amplification means and the sound output means are electrically connected by a sound output path (speaker path 135), and the sound signal amplified by the amplification means is input to the sound output means through the sound output path. A gaming machine to be played,
It is connected to the amplification means by a branch path (branch path 176) branched from the sound output path, the sound signal amplified by the amplification means is input through the branch path, and the volume level of the sound signal is predetermined. A gaming machine comprising an over-level detection circuit (sound break detection circuit 175) for detecting that the reference level of the above has been exceeded.

  According to the characteristic A1, since the level excess detection circuit detects that the volume level of the sound signal input to the sound output means exceeds the reference level, if the reference level is set as the allowable input level of the sound output means. It can be detected as occurrence of sound cracking that the volume level of the sound signal exceeds the allowable input level of the sound output means. In this case, it is possible to reduce the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplifying means in accordance with the timing when the sound cracking occurs, thereby suitably eliminating the sound cracking in the sound output means.

  Here, for example, if the sound output means and the level excess detection circuit are connected to the amplification means by independent paths, the sound signal input to the sound output means and the sound signal input to the level excess detection circuit And the volume level may be different. In this case, the accuracy of sound crack detection by the over-level detection circuit is lowered.

  On the other hand, since the level excess detection circuit is connected to a branch path from the sound output path to which the sound output means is connected, the sound signal amplified by the amplification means is output from the sound output means and the level excess detection circuit. Will be input to both. In this case, since the over-level detection circuit performs sound crack detection on the sound signal actually input to the sound output means, the detection accuracy of the sound crack generation by the over-level detection circuit can be improved. As a result, the occurrence of sound cracking may be erroneously detected by the over-level detection circuit even though there is no sound cracking in the output sound from the sound output means, or the level exceeding the sound level even though sound cracking has occurred. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of sound cracking from being detected by the detection circuit.

  As described above, it is possible to suitably suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the occurrence of sound cracking in the sound output means.

Feature A2. The over-level detection circuit includes:
Comparing means (comparator 202) for comparing the volume level of the sound signal input from the amplifying means with the reference level, and the comparing means compares the volume level of the sound signal with the reference level. And detecting that the volume level of the sound signal exceeds the reference level,
The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the comparison means does not have a phase compensation capacitor.

  According to the feature A2, since the comparison means for comparing the volume level of the sound signal with the reference level does not have a phase compensation capacitor (for example, a comparator), for example, the comparison means has a phase compensation capacitor. Compared with the configuration (for example, an operational amplifier), the response when the sound crack detection is performed by the level excess detection circuit can be enhanced. Therefore, in a configuration in which the over-level detection circuit and the sound output means are connected in parallel to the amplifying means, the sound-break detection is detected by the over-level detection circuit with respect to the timing at which the sound output means has been broken. Delay in timing can be suppressed. Thereby, the detection accuracy of the occurrence of sound cracking by the over-level detection circuit can be further increased.

Feature A3. The over-level detection circuit includes:
A voltage generation unit (voltage generation unit 201) that generates a reference voltage (reference voltage Va) having a voltage value at the reference level;
The comparison unit includes a terminal (−input terminal) to which the sound signal is input from the amplification unit, and a terminal (+ input terminal) to which the reference voltage generated by the voltage generation unit is input. The sound signal and the reference voltage are compared,
The game machine according to Feature A2, wherein the voltage generation unit holds a voltage value of the reference voltage at a predetermined value.

  According to the feature A3, in the configuration in which the volume level of the sound signal and the reference level are compared by the comparison unit, the voltage value of the reference voltage input to the comparison unit is held at a predetermined value as the reference level. It is possible to suppress the reference level, which is a comparison target of the sound volume level, from increasing or decreasing due to fluctuations in the power supply voltage. As a result, the reference voltage input to the comparison means as the reference level can be fixed to a predetermined value in accordance with the allowable input level of the sound output means. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the detection accuracy of occurrence of sound cracking by the over-level detection circuit is lowered due to fluctuations in the power supply voltage.

Feature A4. The over-level detection circuit includes:
Peak holding means (peak hold unit 182) for holding the peak value of the volume level of the sound signal as a hold value;
The gaming machine according to feature A2 or A3, wherein the comparison means compares the hold value held by the peak holding means with the reference level.

  Since the sound signal vibrates, the volume level of the sound signal is sampled at a predetermined timing, and in the configuration in which the sampling value and the reference level are compared by the comparison unit, the sampling value is the peak value of the volume level. Is not limited. Accordingly, although the peak value of the volume level exceeds the reference level, the occurrence of sound cracking cannot be detected by the level excess detection circuit because the sampling value does not exceed the reference level. There is a fear.

  On the other hand, according to the feature A4, since the peak value of the volume level of the sound signal is set as the hold value in the peak holding means, the peak value of the sound signal and the reference level can be compared by the comparison means. Therefore, it can be avoided that the occurrence of sound cracking cannot be detected by the over-level detection circuit even though the peak value of the sound signal is larger than the reference level.

Feature A5. The peak holding means is
A hold capacitor (hold capacitor 191) that is charged by the sound signal input from the amplification means, and a rectifier element (diode 192) that regulates the reverse flow of current from the hold capacitor toward the amplification means. The gaming machine according to feature A4, wherein the gaming machine has a charge voltage of the hold capacitor as the peak value.

  According to the feature A5, in the configuration in which the charge voltage of the hold capacitor is held as the peak value of the sound signal, the discharge from the hold capacitor to the amplifying means is regulated by the rectifier element, so the charge voltage of the hold capacitor is naturally It can suppress that it falls by discharge. Thereby, it can suppress that an error arises between the hold value hold | maintained by a peak holding means, and the peak value of an actual sound signal.

Feature A6. The peak holding means is
An output terminal of the operational amplifier (operational amplifier 194) and an inverting input terminal (-input terminal) are connected by a feedback path (feedback path 195), and have a buffer section (buffer section 193) formed;
The hold capacitor is connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier and the feedback path,
The gaming machine according to Feature A5, wherein the rectifying element is a diode having a forward voltage, and is disposed between the output terminal of the operational amplifier and the hold capacitor in the buffer unit.

  In the configuration in which the discharge from the hold capacitor to the amplification means is regulated by the diode, when the voltage applied to the diode by the sound signal is smaller than the forward voltage, no current flows through the diode even in the forward direction. . For this reason, when the volume level of the sound signal is smaller than the forward voltage of the diode, the hold capacitor is not charged with the sound signal, and the peak value of the sound signal cannot be held as the hold value in the peak holding means. . That is, the occurrence of sound cracking cannot be detected by the level excess detection circuit.

  On the other hand, according to the feature A6, the diode is incorporated in the buffer unit. In this case, since the inverting input terminal and the non-inverting input terminal of the operational amplifier are virtually short-circuited, even if the volume level of the sound signal is smaller than the forward voltage of the diode, the hold capacitor is charged by the sound signal and the peak is maintained. The means can hold the peak value of the sound signal as a hold value. That is, the occurrence of sound cracking can be detected by the level excess detection circuit.

Feature A7. The over-level detection circuit includes:
A feature of the present invention is characterized by comprising reset means (reset unit 183) for clearing the hold value of the peak holding means and causing the peak holding means to hold a new peak value of the sound signal as a hold value. The gaming machine according to any one of A6 to A6.

  According to the feature A7, since the peak holding unit is initialized by the reset unit, the peak holding unit can hold the maximum value of the volume level of the sound signal as a peak value every predetermined period. That is, the peak value for each sound signal can be repeatedly output from the peak holding means to the comparing means as the hold value. In this case, since the peak value for each sound signal is repeatedly input to the comparison means, the comparison means can compare the peak value for each sound signal with the reference level. Therefore, it can be detected by the over-level detection circuit that sound cracks are continuously generated.

  On the other hand, in the configuration in which the peak holding unit is not initialized, for a sound signal that repeatedly increases and decreases the volume level, for example, when the maximum value of the sound signal in one day is held by the peak holding unit, Even if the volume level is lowered, the comparison means always compares the maximum value with the reference level, and the sound crack detection circuit cannot detect that the sound crack detection is continuing.

Feature A8. The peak holding means is
It has a hold capacitor (hold capacitor 191) charged by the sound signal input from the amplification means, and holds the charge voltage of the hold capacitor as the peak value,
The reset means includes
A discharge unit (discharge unit 211) connected to the hold capacitor and discharging the hold capacitor in order to clear the hold value of the peak holding unit;
A switching unit (switch 214) for switching the connection target of the hold capacitor to one of the comparison unit and the discharge unit;
Have
The gaming machine according to Feature A7, wherein the switching unit is configured to shut off the hold capacitor and the comparison unit when the connection target of the hold capacitor is the discharge unit.

  In the configuration in which the hold value of the peak holding means is erased by discharging the hold capacitor, the hold value of the peak holding means fluctuates (decreases) with the discharge of the hold capacitor, and during the fluctuation of the hold value, the comparison means The comparison accuracy between the volume level of the sound signal and the reference level is lowered.

  On the other hand, according to the feature A8, when the hold capacitor is discharged by the discharge unit, the hold capacitor and the comparison unit are blocked by the switching unit. The level is not compared with the reference level. Therefore, it can be avoided that the charging voltage of the hold capacitor is compared with the reference level during the resetting of the peak holding means (while the hold value is changing) and the comparison accuracy by the comparing means is lowered.

  Feature A9. The gaming machine according to claim A7 or A8, further comprising reset execution means (oscillation circuit 217) that causes the reset means to repeatedly execute and hold the hold value for the peak holding means at a predetermined cycle. .

  According to the feature A9, a configuration in which the hold value of the peak holding unit is repeatedly updated and a peak value for each sound signal is repeatedly input to the comparison unit can be realized by the reset execution unit.

  In addition, sound control means for controlling the operation of the amplification means is provided, and when the level excess detection circuit detects that the volume level of the sound signal is larger than the reference level, an excess signal indicating that fact is provided. The output to the control device, and after the excess signal is received by the sound control means, the hold value is continuously cleared by the reset execution means for the reception. It is preferable that

  According to this configuration, when the occurrence of sound cracking is detected by the level excess detection circuit, the hold value of the peak holding means is cleared after the excess signal is input to the sound control means, so the excess signal is output from the level excess detection circuit. In spite of being output, the inconvenience that the hold value is cleared and the output of the excess signal is stopped before the excess signal is input to the sound control means can be avoided.

Feature A10. Sound control means (sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72) for controlling the operation of the amplification means,
When the sound level of the sound signal is detected to be higher than the reference level, the level excess detection circuit outputs an excess signal (sound break signal) indicating that to the control means. ,
The sound control means is a volume level reduction means (step in the sub-MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72) that performs processing for reducing the volume level of the sound signal when the excess signal is output from the level excess detection circuit. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, which has a function of executing the processing of S1404 and S1408.

  According to the feature A10, it is possible to suppress a delay in the timing at which the volume level of the sound signal is reduced with respect to the timing at which sound cracking occurs in the output sound from the sound output means. Thereby, in order to eliminate sound cracking, the output volume can be quickly reduced.

Feature A11. The volume level reducing means is
Amplification rate limiting means for reducing the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplification means when the excess signal is output from the level excess detection circuit (the processing of steps S1508 and S1710 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72) The gaming machine according to Feature A10, which has a function to be executed).

  According to the feature A11, since the volume reduction is performed by the amplification factor limiting unit, the hall manager, the player, etc. operate the volume switch to eliminate the sound cracking in the sound output unit. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize a configuration that can eliminate sound cracking by quickly reducing the output volume.

  Feature A12. The volume level reducing means can reduce the amplification factor in a plurality of stages by the amplification factor limiting means until the excess signal is not output from the level excess detection circuit. The gaming machine described.

  In the configuration in which the level excess detection circuit is connected to the branch path of the sound output path to which the sound output means is connected, when the occurrence of sound cracking in the sound output means is detected by the level excess detection circuit, the sound output means already There is a high possibility that the output volume of is so high that sound cracks occur. In this case, if the one-time decrease in the amplification factor in the amplification unit is excessively increased, sound cracking in the sound output unit can be quickly eliminated, but the output volume from the sound output unit is greatly increased. There is a concern that it will become smaller and give the player a sense of incongruity.

  On the other hand, according to the feature A12, when sound cracking occurs in the output sound from the sound output means, the amplification factor is reduced in a plurality of stages by the amplification means. It can suppress that the gain in a means is made small too much. Thereby, it can suppress that the fall amount of the output volume from a sound output means is too large, and gives a player discomfort.

Feature A13. The volume level reducing means is
When the amplification factor is reduced by the amplification factor limiting unit in a plurality of stages, a predetermined waiting period (sound) is required between the amplification factor limiting unit reducing the amplification factor and then reducing the amplification factor. The gaming machine according to Feature A12, further comprising standby means for securing a crack continuation determination period) (a function of executing the process of step S1507 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound and light control device 72).

  According to feature A13, when the amplification factor is reduced in a plurality of stages by the amplification means, a waiting period is ensured between the stages, so that the amplification factor is not reduced in a plurality of stages at once. The rate can be gradually reduced over a period of time. Therefore, the uncomfortable feeling given to the player by reducing the output volume can be alleviated.

Feature A14. When the excess signal is output from the level excess detection circuit, the volume level reducing unit measures a measurement unit (a sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72) that measures a duration during which the excess signal is continuously output. The function of executing the process of step S1506 in FIG.
The standby means determines whether or not the duration measured by the measuring means has reached the standby period.
The gaming machine according to Feature A13, wherein the amplification factor limiting means lowers the amplification factor when the standby means determines that the duration has reached the standby period.

  According to the feature A14, when sound cracking is continuously generated in the output sound from the sound output means, the sound volume can be reduced to eliminate the sound cracking. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the volume from being limited when noise is generated in the sound signal for a moment. In addition, in the configuration in which the amplification factor of the amplifying unit is gradually reduced stepwise, the duration of sound cracking can be measured using the standby period. In this case, unlike the configuration in which the timing for measuring the duration of sound cracking and the standby period are arranged in time series, the measurement timing for sound cracking and the standby period are secured simultaneously in time series. Can be ensured continuously, and sound crack measurement can be continuously performed when the amplification factor is lowered stepwise.

Feature A15. The volume level reducing means is
An excess determination means for determining whether or not the excess signal is output from the level excess detection circuit (function of executing steps S1503 and S1703 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72); The gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A14, characterized in that, after the amplification factor is reduced by one step by a limiting unit, the output determination of the excess signal is performed by the excess determining unit. .

  According to feature A15, in the configuration in which the amplification factor in the amplification means is reduced in a plurality of stages, an excess determination as to whether or not the volume level of the sound signal exceeds the reference level each time the amplification factor is reduced by one stage. Since (sound cracking determination) is performed, it can be suppressed that the amplification factor is further reduced even though the volume level of the sound signal does not exceed the reference level. Therefore, a configuration for preventing the amplification factor from being excessively small can be realized.

<Feature B group>
The invention of the following feature group B is effective for the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a speaker as sound output means, and the speaker outputs a variety of performance sounds according to the gaming state, so that the degree of attention to the game can be increased. In addition, since the output sound from the speaker is used as a notification sound, it is possible to notify the state of the gaming machine or notify the occurrence of fraud.

  The speaker outputs sound when a sound signal is input from the amplifier, and the sound volume output from the speaker is determined by setting the amplification factor of the sound signal by the amplifier. In a gaming machine in which the amplification factor of the amplifier is variably set, the output volume from the speaker can be changed according to the amplification factor of the amplifier. For example, in a gaming machine provided with a volume switch, the amplification factor of the amplifier is changed by operating the volume switch, and thereby the output volume from the speaker is changed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-320542). 2005-261808).

  However, when the volume level of the sound signal input to the speaker is higher than the allowable input level of the speaker, the sound output from the speaker may sound like a crack due to distortion of the waveform of the sound signal. In this case, the output sound that should enhance the gameability and convenience will give the player an unpleasant feeling.

  On the other hand, when the volume switch is operated so that the amplification factor of the amplifier is reduced, the volume level is reduced for all parts of the sound signal input to the speaker, and sound cracks occurring in the speaker are reduced. It can be solved.

  Here, when the sound output from the speaker is inflated by volume, the production effect and notification effect are enhanced because the output sound contains a large volume part that is louder than other parts. It has been.

  However, the volume level of the output sound is likely to exceed the allowable input level of the speaker, and sound cracks are likely to occur. On the other hand, in a non-high volume portion, the volume level is unlikely to exceed the allowable input level of the speaker, and sound cracking is unlikely to occur. Therefore, if the volume level is reduced for all parts of the sound signal by the volume switch, the sound cracking can be resolved in the period during which the large volume part is output, but the period during which the non-large volume part is output Then, although sound cracking does not occur, there arises a problem that the volume is further reduced and it is difficult to hear.

  Therefore, if the difference in volume level between the large volume part and the non-large volume part is reduced in the output sound, sound cracking occurs in the large volume part, and the volume in the non-large volume part is excessively small. It becomes possible to eliminate both of becoming. However, if the difference in volume level between the high volume portion and the non-volume portion is reduced, it is impossible to add inflection to the production sound and the production effect may be reduced.

  Also, if the allowable input level of the speaker is reasonably high relative to the volume level of the loud volume part, even if the volume level difference between the loud volume part and the non-loud volume part is relatively large, the sound in the loud volume part It is possible to suppress the occurrence of cracks and excessive reduction of the volume in a non-large volume portion. Therefore, designers who design gaming machines should create sound data for outputting production sounds, notification sounds, etc. so that the volume level of the loud volume part is suitable for the allowable input level of the speaker. Is preferred.

  However, the sound data created by the designer and the like and the allowable input level of the speaker are not always compatible. For example, if the sound data must be created before the speaker manufacturer or type is determined, or if the speaker manufacturer or type is changed due to a design change, the sound level of the loud volume part In some cases, the input level may be higher than the allowable input level, and there is still a problem that the sound volume is broken at the high volume portion or the non-large volume portion becomes excessively low. For this reason, designers are forced to create sound data that outputs production sound without inflection in order to adapt the volume level of the output sound to any of many types of speakers. The degree of freedom of creation will decrease.

Feature B1. A gaming machine body (inner frame 13);
A gaming machine front body (front door frame 14) provided to be rotatable forward of the gaming machine with respect to the gaming machine body;
Storage means for storing sound data (common ROM 147 of the sound light control device 72);
Amplifying means (amplifier 171) for amplifying a sound signal generated from the sound data stored in the storage means;
Sound output means (upper speaker 91, lower speaker 101) for outputting sound at a volume corresponding to the volume level of the sound signal by inputting the sound signal amplified by the amplification means;
With
The storage means is provided in the gaming machine body, and the sound output means is a gaming machine provided in the gaming machine front body,
The sound signal amplified by the amplifying means is input, and an over-level detection circuit (sound crack detection circuit 175) for detecting that the volume level of the sound signal exceeds a predetermined reference level is provided. A gaming machine.

  In the feature B1, since the storage means for storing the sound data is provided in the gaming machine main body and the sound output means is provided in the gaming machine front body, the gaming machine body and the gaming machine front body are manufactured separately. For example, sound data for generating a sound signal may not be suitable for the sound output means. In this case, if an effect sound with inflection or the like is output from the sound output means, there is a concern about the occurrence of sound cracking in a large volume portion or excessively low volume in a non-large volume portion.

  On the other hand, since it is detected by the level excess detection circuit that the volume level of the sound signal input to the sound output means exceeds the reference level, if the reference level is the allowable input level of the sound output means, It can be detected as occurrence of sound cracking that the volume level of the sound signal exceeds the allowable input level of the sound output means. In this case, by reducing the amplification factor of the sound signal at the amplification means in accordance with the timing at which the sound breakup occurs, the sound breakup occurs even if an effect sound with inflection is output from the sound output means. It is possible to reduce the sound volume by reducing the sound volume for the large sound volume portion, and it is possible to avoid the sound volume from becoming excessively low for the non-high sound volume portion in which sound breakage does not occur. Therefore, even if the volume level of sound data created by a designer or the like does not match the allowable input level of the sound output means, it is possible to suitably output sound from the sound output means.

  As described above, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of freedom in creating sound data, and it is possible to suitably suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the occurrence of sound cracking in the sound output means.

  Feature B2. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the over-level detection circuit is provided in the gaming machine main body of the gaming machine main body and the gaming machine front body.

  According to the feature B2, since the over-level detection circuit is provided in the gaming machine main body, when a new gaming machine main body is installed in accordance with the change of the gaming machine model, the sound output means is provided together with the gaming machine front body and the like. Even if the existing game machine is used, an over-level detection circuit can be newly installed for the game machine.

  Feature B3. The gaming machine according to Feature B1 or B2, wherein the amplifying means is provided in the gaming machine main body of the gaming machine main body and the gaming machine front body.

  When the amplifying means and the sound output means are not compatible as in feature B3, the sound data and the sound are output when the amplification factor of the amplifying means is too large or too small with respect to the allowable input level of the sound output means. As in the case where the output means is not suitable, there is a concern that sound cracking may occur in a large volume portion or that the volume may be excessively reduced in a non-large volume portion.

  Even in this case, since the occurrence of sound cracking is detected by the over-level detection circuit, it is possible to reduce the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplification means in accordance with the timing at which the sound cracking is detected. That is, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of sound cracking in a large volume portion and excessive reduction in volume in a non-volume portion.

Feature B4. Sound control means (sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72) for controlling the operation of the amplification means,
When detecting that the volume level of the sound signal is larger than the reference level, the level excess detection circuit outputs an excess signal (sound break signal) indicating that to the sound control means. Yes,
The sound control means is
Amplification rate limiting means for reducing the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplification means when the excess signal is output from the level excess detection circuit (the processing of steps S1508 and S1710 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72) Function to execute)
When the amplification factor is limited by the amplification factor limiting unit, a restriction release unit (sound light) that cancels the amplification factor limitation by the amplification factor limiting unit in accordance with a predetermined timing. The function of executing the processing of steps S1603, S1905, S1907, and S1912 in the sub MPU 142 of the control device 72);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B4, the amplification factor restriction is released at a predetermined timing, so that the sound crack can be eliminated by restricting the amplification factor for the large volume portion, and the amplification factor restriction is released for the non-large volume portion. In this way, excessive reduction in volume can be avoided. In this case, it is possible to suppress the non-loud volume portion from becoming difficult to hear, and to suppress the effects such as the rendering effect exhibited by the inflection of the output sound.

Feature B5. The sound control means determines whether the output sound from the sound output means is a notification sound for notifying that an abnormality has occurred (notification sound including a fraud occurrence sound and a guide sound). Determination means (function to execute the process of step S1401 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72),
The amplification factor limiting unit is a notification sound limiting unit (a sub-unit of the sound light control device 72) that decreases the amplification factor of the notification sound when the notification sound determination unit determines that the output sound is the notification sound. MPU 142 has a function of executing the process of step S1508),
The restriction canceling means is a notification sound canceling means for canceling the restriction on the amplification factor in accordance with the end timing when the output of the notification sound is ended (the process of step S1603 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound control device 72). The gaming machine according to Feature B4, which has a function to be executed).

  According to the feature B5, when the amplification factor is limited for the notification sound, the notification sound amplification factor restriction is canceled in accordance with the end timing of the notification sound output. It can be avoided that the amplification factor is continuously limited for the effect sound or the like despite the sound output being completed. Therefore, when the notification sound is broken among the output sounds from the sound output means, it is possible to eliminate the cracking of the sound and to avoid the disadvantage that the volume of the effect sound that is not the notification sound becomes excessively small.

Feature B6. The sound control means is an effect sound determination means for determining whether the output sound from the sound output means is an effect sound for performing a game effect (the process of step S1405 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72) Function to execute)
The amplification factor limiting unit is a production sound limiting unit (a sub-unit of the sound light control device 72) that reduces the amplification factor of the production sound when the production sound determination unit determines that the output sound is the production sound. The MPU 142 has a function of executing the process of step S1710).
The restriction release means is a game turn release means (step in the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72) for releasing the restriction on the amplification factor in accordance with the end timing when the game turn accompanied by the output of the effect sound is ended. The gaming machine according to Feature B4 or B5, which has a function of executing the processing of S1907).

  According to the feature B6, when the amplification factor is limited for the effect sound, the effect sound amplification factor restriction is canceled in accordance with the end timing of each game round. Although the output is completed, it is possible to avoid that the amplification factor is continuously limited for the effect sound or notification sound of the next game time. Therefore, when the production sound is broken in the output sound from the sound output means, the sound breakage can be eliminated, and the inconvenience that the production sound and the notification sound of the next game time become excessively small is avoided. it can.

  In addition, one game time is displayed by displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination of whether to give a privilege to the player after starting the display of the variation of the pattern on the display unit. This is until the variable display is finished.

  Feature B7. The game according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein the over-level detection circuit includes variable setting means (second resistor R2) capable of variably setting the reference level. Machine.

  According to the feature B7, the reference level can be changed in accordance with the allowable input level of the sound output means. Therefore, regardless of the manufacturer and type of the sound output means, the allowable input level of the sound output means and the reference It can be avoided that the level does not match. Therefore, by setting the reference level in accordance with the actual allowable input level of the sound output means, the detection accuracy of the over-level detection circuit can be increased.

Feature B8. The over-level detection circuit includes a comparison unit (comparator 202) that compares the volume level of the sound signal input from the amplification unit with a reference level, and a reference voltage (reference voltage Va) whose voltage value is the reference level. ), And the comparison means compares the sound signal with the reference voltage, so that the volume level of the sound signal exceeds the reference level. Is to detect
The voltage generation unit holds the voltage value of the reference voltage at a predetermined value,
The gaming machine according to Feature B7, wherein the variable setting means variably sets a voltage value of the reference voltage held by the voltage generator.

  According to the feature B8, a configuration is provided in which the reference level can be variably set in the over-level detection circuit in which the occurrence of sound cracking is detected by comparing the volume level of the sound signal with the reference level by the comparison means. it can. Moreover, since the voltage value of the reference voltage is set to the reference level, the reference level can be easily changed by simply changing the voltage value.

  The comparison means is preferably a comparator. In this case, it is possible to improve the responsiveness when sound crack detection is performed as compared with the case where the comparison means is an operational amplifier.

  Feature B9. The variable setting means has a variable resistor (second resistor R2) that makes the resistance value variable, and changes the voltage value of the reference voltage by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor. The gaming machine according to Feature B8, wherein:

  According to the feature B9, the reference level can be changed by an easy operation of changing the resistance value of the variable resistor.

Feature B10. The comparison unit includes a first terminal (−input terminal) to which the sound signal is input from the amplification unit, and a second terminal (+ input terminal) to which the reference voltage generated by the voltage generation unit is input. Have
The voltage generator is
A shunt regulator (shunt regulator 203) for holding the voltage value of the reference voltage at the predetermined value;
A first resistor (first resistor R1) and a second resistor (second resistor R2) connected in series;
Have
The shunt regulator is
A reference connected between the first resistor and the second resistor;
A cathode connected to the opposite side of the first resistor to the second resistor and connected to the second terminal of the comparison means;
Have
The gaming machine according to Feature B9, wherein at least one of the first resistor and the second resistor is the variable resistor.

  According to the feature B10, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the reference level can be changed by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor. In addition, since the voltage generator includes the shunt regulator, it is possible to improve the holding accuracy for holding the reference voltage at a predetermined value. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the reference level fluctuates and the detection accuracy of the over-level detection circuit decreases.

Feature B11. The first resistor is a fixed resistor whose resistance value is not variable;
The gaming machine according to Feature B10, wherein the second resistor is the variable resistor.

  In a configuration in which the reference of the shunt regulator is connected between the first resistor and the second resistor, and the cathode is connected to the first resistor, the reference current flowing through the reference flows to the first resistor, so that the first resistor As a result, power loss occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the feature B11, since the first resistor is a fixed resistor, it is avoided that the resistance value of the first resistor is increased and the power loss in the first resistor is increased due to the reference current. it can. Therefore, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the reference level can be changed while suppressing power loss at the first resistor R1.

  Feature B12. The variable setting means has a variable operation part (operation knob 112) provided on the back side of the gaming machine main body, and changes the reference level by operating the variable operation part. The gaming machine according to any one of features B7 to B11.

  According to the feature B12, since the variable operation unit capable of changing the reference level is provided, even if the sound data stored in the storage means does not conform to the allowable input level of the sound output means, the allowable input The reference level can be easily variably set according to the level. That is, the reference level can be easily set to a value that can detect the sound cracking in the sound output means by the level excess detection circuit. Moreover, since the variable operation unit is provided on the back side of the gaming machine main body, it is difficult for the player to operate the variable operation unit, and the hall manager preferably sets the state (reference level) of the variable operation unit. Can be managed.

Feature B13. An outer frame (outer frame 11) that supports the game machine main body so as to be opened and closed;
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B12, wherein the sound output means is provided in the outer frame in addition to the front body of the gaming machine.

  In the configuration where the gaming machine main body is supported by the outer frame, due to the fact that the gaming machine main body and the outer frame are manufactured separately, the sound data is added to the sound output means of the gaming machine main body, There is a concern that the content does not match the sound output means of the outer frame.

  On the other hand, according to the feature B13, it is possible to detect occurrence of sound cracking in the sound output means of the outer frame in addition to the sound output means of the gaming machine main body by the level excess detection circuit. In this case, as with the sound output means of the gaming machine body, the sound output means of the outer frame can be reduced by reducing the volume of the output sound where the sound cracking occurs, It is possible to avoid excessively reducing the volume of the portion where no sound cracking occurs.

<Feature C group>
The invention of the following feature group C is effective for the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a speaker as sound output means, and the speaker outputs a variety of performance sounds according to the gaming state, so that the degree of attention to the game can be increased. In addition, since the output sound from the speaker is used as a notification sound, it is possible to notify the state of the gaming machine or notify the occurrence of fraud.

  The speaker outputs sound when a sound signal is input from the amplifier, and the sound volume output from the speaker is determined by setting the amplification factor of the sound signal by the amplifier. In a gaming machine in which the amplification factor of the amplifier is variably set, the output volume from the speaker can be changed according to the amplification factor of the amplifier. For example, in a gaming machine provided with a volume switch, the amplification factor of the amplifier is changed by operating the volume switch, and thereby the output volume from the speaker is changed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-320542). 2005-261808).

  However, when the volume level of the sound signal input to the speaker is higher than the allowable input level of the speaker, the sound output from the speaker may sound like a crack due to distortion of the waveform of the sound signal. In this case, the output sound that should enhance the gameability and convenience will give the player an unpleasant feeling.

  On the other hand, when the volume switch is operated so that the amplification factor of the amplifier becomes small, the volume level of the sound signal input to the speaker becomes small, and the sound cracking occurring in the speaker can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

  Here, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of speakers, sound is output from all speakers because different sound signals are input for each speaker, or the allowable input level differs for each speaker due to tolerances. Even if it is, it is considered that sound cracks may occur only in some speakers.

  In this case, if the output volume of all the speakers is reduced as a whole by operating the volume switch, it is possible to eliminate sound cracks occurring in some of the speakers. However, in this case, the output sound volume is reduced even for a speaker that is not sound-splitting, and sound cracking can be eliminated, while the effect and notification effect by the effect sound and notification sound from each speaker may be reduced. . Therefore, it is conceivable to provide individual volume switches for all speakers, but for hall managers, etc., it is possible to determine which speaker has sound cracking from multiple speakers and eliminate sound cracking for that speaker. The task of reducing the volume as much as possible is more difficult.

Feature C1. Amplifying means (amplifier 171) for amplifying the sound signal;
A plurality of sound output means (upper speaker 91, lower speaker 101) for outputting sound at a volume corresponding to the volume level of the sound signal by inputting the sound signal amplified by the amplifying means; ,
An over-level detection circuit (sound crack detection circuit 175) for detecting that the sound signal amplified by the amplification means is input and that the volume level of the sound signal exceeds a predetermined reference level;
With
The over-level detection circuit is provided for each sound output means, and detects that the volume level is higher than the reference level for the sound signal input to the corresponding sound output means. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the feature C1, since the level excess detection circuit detects that the volume level of the sound signal input to the sound output means exceeds the reference level, if the reference level is set as the allowable input level of the sound output means. It can be detected as occurrence of sound cracking that the volume level of the sound signal exceeds the allowable input level of the sound output means. In this case, it is possible to reduce the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplifying means in accordance with the timing when the sound cracking occurs, thereby suitably eliminating the sound cracking in the sound output means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the occurrence of sound cracking in the sound output means.

  Moreover, since the occurrence of sound cracking is detected individually by each level excess detection circuit for each sound output means, the sound output means in which sound cracking has occurred is reduced in volume to eliminate sound cracking and The sound output means that is not cracked can be held as it is without reducing the volume. Therefore, when sound cracking occurs in some of the plurality of sound output means, it is possible to eliminate the sound cracking, and the output sound of all the sound output means is reduced. It can avoid that a production effect and a notification effect fall.

  As described above, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of sound output means, it is possible to suitably eliminate the sound cracking when sound cracking occurs in the sound output means. Thus, it can be suppressed that the production effect and the notification effect are lowered.

Feature C2. Sound control means (sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72) for controlling the operation of the amplification means,
Each level excess detection circuit, when detecting that the volume level of the sound signal input to the corresponding sound output means is larger than the reference level, an excess signal (sound break signal) indicating that fact Each output to the sound control means,
The sound control means is
When the excess signal is output from at least one of the level excess detection circuits, the sound output unit corresponding to the level excess detection circuit performs a process for reducing the volume level of the sound signal. The game machine according to Feature C1, further comprising a sound volume level reducing unit (function of executing the processing of steps S1404 and S1408 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72).

  According to the feature C2, when the sound cracking generated by some of the plurality of sound output units is eliminated, the timing at which the volume level of the sound signal is reduced with respect to the timing at which the sound split occurs. Can be delayed. As a result, for some sound output means, the output sound can be quickly reduced in order to eliminate sound cracking.

Feature C3. The volume level reducing means is
When the excess signal is output from at least one of the level excess detection circuits, by specifying the output source of the excess signal, which of the plurality of sound output means is targeted for volume level reduction Sound splitting specifying means (function for executing the process of step S1704 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72);
Amplification rate limiting means (step S1710 in sub-MPU 142 of sound light control device 72) for reducing the amplification factor in the amplification means for the sound signal input to the sound output means specified by the sound cracking specification means. Function to execute processing)
The gaming machine according to Feature C2, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C3, since the volume restriction is performed by the amplification factor limiting means when the sound cracking generated by some of the plurality of sound outputting means is eliminated, the hall manager or the player Therefore, it is not necessary to perform operations such as operating a volume switch in order to eliminate sound cracking, and it is possible to suitably realize a configuration in which output sound is quickly reduced to eliminate sound cracking.

Feature C4. The volume level reducing means is
Decreasing amount determining means (determining whether or not the decreasing rate of the amplification factor (value of the effect sound limiting counter S) reduced by the amplifying rate limiting means is larger than a predetermined determination value (M times 2). The function of executing the process of step S1804 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72);
The sound signal that is input to the sound output means that is not specified by the sound crack specifying means when it is determined that the reduction width of the amplification factor of the sound signal is larger than the determination value by the decrease width determination means And sub-restricting means (function of executing steps S1803, S1806, and S1807 in the sub-MPU 142 of the sound and light control device 72) for reducing the amplification factor in the amplifying means. A gaming machine according to Feature C3.

  If sound cracking has occurred in some of the sound output means among the plurality of sound output means, the sound volume is reduced by reducing the output volume only for the sound output means in which sound cracking has occurred. However, if the volume reduction is increased to some extent, the difference in output volume between the sound output means where the sound is broken and the sound break means where the sound is not broken becomes large. There is concern that the balance of the volume of the output sound from each of them will be lost.

  On the other hand, according to the feature C4, not only the output sound from the sound output means in which sound cracking has occurred, but also the volume of the output sound from the sound output means in which sound cracking has not occurred is appropriately reduced. Therefore, the difference in volume between the sound output means in which sound cracking has occurred and the sound output means in which sound breakup has not occurred does not become excessively large. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the balance of the sound volume from being lost between the sound output means in which sound breakage occurs and the sound output means in which sound breakup does not occur.

  Feature C5. The gaming machine according to Feature C4, wherein the rate at which the gain is reduced by the sub-limiter is smaller than the rate at which the gain is decreased by the gain-limiter.

  According to the feature C5, the output volume reduction amount for the sound output means in which sound splitting does not occur is smaller than the output volume reduction range for the sound output means in which sound splitting occurs. Unlike the case where the output volume from all the sound output means is reduced with the same reduction width, it is possible to eliminate the sound cracking while suppressing the reduction in the rendering effect and the like.

Feature C6. The volume level reducing means can reduce the gain in a plurality of stages by the gain limiting means until the excess signal is not output from the level excess detection circuit.
The gaming machine according to Feature C4 or C5, wherein the number of stages at which the amplification factor is reduced by the sub-limiter is smaller than the number of stages at which the amplification factor is reduced by the amplification-factor limiting unit.

  According to the feature C6, since the amplification factor is decreased in a plurality of stages by the amplification unit for the sound output unit in which sound cracking occurs, the amplification factor in the amplification unit is excessively decreased as the sound cracking occurs. That can be suppressed. Thereby, it can suppress that the fall amount of the output volume from a sound output means is too large, and gives a player discomfort.

  Moreover, since the number of steps for reducing the sound volume for the sound output means without sound cracking is reduced compared to the number of steps for reducing the sound volume for the sound output means with sound cracking, all Unlike the case where the output volume from the sound output means is reduced by the same number of steps, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the production effect and the notification effect.

  Feature C7. The sub-limiting means individually sets a ratio for decreasing the amplification factor of each sound signal input to the sound output means when there are a plurality of the sound output means not specified by the sound break specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C6, wherein the gaming machine is a thing.

  According to the feature C7, in the configuration in which the output volume can be balanced with respect to the sound output means in which sound breakage occurs and the sound output means in which sound breakage does not occur, the sound output in which no sound breakage occurs When there are multiple means, the output volume reduction range is set individually for each sound output means that does not cause sound splitting, so balance the output volume for sound output means that do not cause sound cracking. Can do. As a result, the sound volume can be harmonized with respect to the output sounds from all the sound output means after the occurrence of the sound cracking in the sound output means is eliminated.

Feature C8. The plurality of sound output means include an upper sound output means (upper speaker 91) provided in the upper part of the gaming machine, and a lower sound output means (lower speaker 101) provided in the lower part of the gaming machine. Is included,
The sub-limiting means includes a plurality of the sound output means not specified by the sound split specifying means, and the sound output means includes both the upper sound output means and the lower sound output means. The ratio of decreasing the amplification factor of the sound signal input to the upper sound output means is set differently from the ratio of decreasing the amplification ratio of the sound signal input to the lower sound output means. The gaming machine according to Feature C7, wherein:

  How the player can hear the output sound from the upper sound output means and the output sound from the lower sound output means due to differences in the distance between the sound output means and the player's head, etc. May be different.

  Therefore, according to the feature C8, there is no sound cracking in the configuration in which the output volume can be balanced between the sound output means in which sound cracking has occurred and the sound output means in which sound cracking has not occurred. When the sound output means includes both the upper sound output means and the lower sound output means, the upper sound output means and the lower sound output means make a difference in the amount of decrease in the output volume. Thereby, about the output sound from each sound output means in which the sound crack does not generate | occur | produce, it can suppress that discomfort arises in the way of hearing the output sound for a player.

Feature C9. The plurality of sound output means include a high sound output means (upper speaker 91) to which a sound signal for outputting at least a high sound is input, and a low sound output means (lower sound to which a sound signal for outputting a low sound is input. Side speaker 101), and
The sub-limiting means includes a plurality of the sound output means not specified by the sound break specifying means, and the high sound output means when the sound output means includes both the high sound output means and the low sound output means. The ratio for decreasing the amplification factor of the sound signal input to the output means and the ratio for decreasing the amplification factor of the sound signal input to the bass output means are set differently. The gaming machine according to feature C7 or C8.

  The output sound from the high sound output means and the output sound from the low sound output means may be heard differently by the player due to different frequency bands between the high sound and the low sound.

  Therefore, according to the feature C9, there is no sound cracking in the configuration in which the output volume can be balanced between the sound output means in which sound cracking has occurred and the sound output means in which sound cracking has not occurred. When both the high sound output means and the low sound output means are included in the sound output means, there is a difference in the amount of decrease in the output volume between the high sound output means and the low sound output means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about how the high sound and the low sound with no sound cracking are heard by the player.

Feature C10. The plurality of sound output means includes a set of sound output means,
The sub-limiting means includes a plurality of the sound output means that are not specified by the sound split specifying means, and the set of sound output means is included in the sound output means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C9, characterized in that the ratio of decreasing the amplification factor of each sound signal input to the sound output means is set to be the same.

  According to the feature C10, the player can hear even the output sounds from a plurality of sound output means due to the same output sound pitch (frequency band) and the same installation height. May be the same.

  Therefore, according to the feature C10, no sound cracking occurs in the configuration in which the output volume can be balanced between the sound output means in which sound cracking has occurred and the sound output means in which sound cracking has not occurred. Even when there are a plurality of sound output means, if the sound output means includes a set of sound output means, the output volume reduction width is the same for the set of sound output means. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress that the difference in the decrease in the output volume of the set of sound output means in which no sound breaks occur, and causing the player to feel uncomfortable in how the output sound is heard.

  Feature C11. Each of the excess level detection circuits includes variable setting means (second resistor R2) capable of individually variably setting each of the reference levels. Any one of the characteristics C1 to C10 The gaming machine described in one.

  According to the feature C11, since it is possible to set the reference level according to the allowable input level of the sound output means for each of the level excess detection circuits, regardless of the manufacturer and type of each sound output means, The occurrence of sound cracking in these sound output means can be detected individually by the level excess detection circuit. Therefore, when the performance differs for each sound output means or when the tolerance input level of each sound output means includes a tolerance, the reference level is set according to the actual allowable input level for each sound output means. As a result, the detection accuracy of each of the excess level detection circuits can be increased.

<Feature D group>
The invention of the following feature group D is effective for the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a speaker as sound output means, and the speaker outputs a variety of performance sounds according to the gaming state, so that the degree of attention to the game can be increased. In addition, since the output sound from the speaker is used as a notification sound, it is possible to notify the state of the gaming machine or notify the occurrence of fraud.

  The speaker outputs sound when a sound signal is input from the amplifier, and the sound volume output from the speaker is determined by setting the amplification factor of the sound signal by the amplifier. In a gaming machine in which the amplification factor of the amplifier is variably set, the output volume from the speaker can be changed according to the amplification factor of the amplifier. For example, in a gaming machine provided with a volume switch, the amplification factor of the amplifier is changed by operating the volume switch, and thereby the output volume from the speaker is changed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-320542). 2005-261808).

  However, when the volume level of the sound signal input to the speaker is higher than the allowable input level of the speaker, the sound output from the speaker may sound like a crack due to distortion of the waveform of the sound signal. In this case, the output sound that should enhance the gameability and convenience will give the player an unpleasant feeling.

  On the other hand, when the volume switch is operated so that the amplification factor of the amplifier becomes small, the volume level of the sound signal input to the speaker becomes small, and the sound cracking occurring in the speaker can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

  However, when a hall manager, a player, or the like operates the volume switch, the operation mode is not necessarily a mode suitable for sound cracking each time. For example, in a configuration in which the volume switch is arranged on the back side of the gaming machine, the amplifier is so large that the hall manager does not break the sound outside the business hall opening hours (for example, before opening, after closing, or on a regular holiday). Although it is assumed that the volume switch is operated so that the amplification factor of the sound becomes small, this does not eliminate the sound cracking in accordance with the timing at which the sound cracking actually occurs. In addition, in the configuration in which the volume switch is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, it becomes possible for the player to operate the volume switch during the game, but it is not necessary to operate the volume switch every time a sound break occurs. The operation frequency of the volume switch increases, which is not realistic for the player.

Feature D1. Amplifying means (amplifier 171) for amplifying the sound signal;
Sound output means (upper speaker 91, lower speaker 101) for outputting sound at a volume corresponding to the volume level of the sound signal by inputting the sound signal amplified by the amplification means;
An over-level detection circuit (sound crack detection circuit 175) for detecting that the sound signal amplified by the amplification means is input and that the volume level of the sound signal exceeds a predetermined reference level;
Sound control means for controlling the operation of the amplification means (sub-MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72);
With
When detecting that the volume level of the sound signal is larger than the reference level, the level excess detection circuit outputs an excess signal (sound break signal) indicating that to the sound control means. Yes,
The sound control means performs volume level reduction processing for reducing the volume level of the sound signal when the excess signal is output from the level excess detection circuit in a situation where the gaming machine is in a specific state. A gaming machine characterized by having level reduction means (function of executing steps S1404 and S1408 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72).

  According to the feature D1, since the level excess detection circuit detects that the volume level of the sound signal input to the sound output means exceeds the reference level, if the reference level is set as the allowable input level of the sound output means, It can be detected as occurrence of sound cracking that the volume level of the sound signal exceeds the allowable input level of the sound output means. For this reason, when the gaming machine is in a specific state, the volume level reduction processing is performed in accordance with the timing at which the sound breaking occurs, so that it is possible to suitably eliminate the sound breaking in the sound output means. . Therefore, it is possible to use properly whether or not to break the output sound according to the gaming state, the type of output sound, and the like.

  Moreover, when sound cracking is eliminated, the over-level detection circuit outputs an excess signal when it detects the occurrence of sound cracking. It can suppress that the timing which makes the volume level of a signal small is delayed. Therefore, the output volume can be quickly reduced in order to eliminate sound cracking.

  As described above, it is possible to suitably suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the occurrence of sound cracking in the sound output means.

Feature D2. Provided with operation means (volume switch 111) that can be switched to a plurality of states by being operated,
The volume level reducing means is
When the excess signal is output from the over-level detection circuit, the amplification factor limiting means (sub-unit of the sound light control device 72) reduces the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplification means according to the state of the operation means. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, further comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S1508 and S1710 in the MPU 142).

  According to the feature D2, when the occurrence of sound breakage is detected by the over-level detection circuit, the output volume is reduced by the amplification factor limiting means, so that the hall manager, the player, etc. It is possible to suitably realize a configuration that can eliminate sound cracking by quickly reducing the output volume.

  Here, in the configuration in which the sound volume is reduced when the sound breakup occurs in the output sound from the sound output means, the sound effect can be eliminated, but the effect of the output sound can be reduced by reducing the sound volume. The notification effect may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to this configuration, since the output volume from the sound output means is reduced according to the state of the operation means, by operating the operation means, even if sound cracking occurs, the sound breakage is reduced. You can switch to a mode that does not resolve. Therefore, it is possible to select whether to give priority to the elimination of the sound breakage generated in the output sound or the maintenance of the output volume, and the selection can be performed by an easy operation of operating the operation means.

Feature D3. The operation means switches between a first state (a state in which the position is adjusted to the scale F) and a second state different from the first state (a state in which the position is adjusted to any one of the scales 1 to 5). Is possible,
The gain limiting means reduces the gain when the operating means is in the first state, and does not reduce the gain when the operating means is in the second state. A gaming machine according to feature D2.

  According to the feature D3, by setting the operating means in the first state in advance, it is possible to set a mode for eliminating the sound cracking when the sound breaking occurs, and the operating means is set in the second state in advance. By setting, it is possible to set a mode in which sound cracking is not eliminated even if sound cracking occurs. Therefore, it is possible to select whether to give priority to the elimination of sound cracking or the maintenance of the output volume by an easy operation of switching the operating means to the first state or the second state.

  Feature D4. The amplification factor limiting unit reduces the amplification factor when the operation unit is in the first state on condition that the sound output from the sound output unit is an effect sound for performing a game effect. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the amplification factor is not reduced when the operating means is in the second state.

  According to the feature D4, according to the contribution degree of the production sound with respect to enhancing the playability in the gaming machine, it can be appropriately selected by the operation means whether to give priority to the elimination of the sound cracking or the maintenance of the volume. .

Feature D5. The sound volume level reducing means has excess determination means (function for executing the process of step S1703 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72) for determining whether or not the excess signal is output from the level excess detection circuit. And
The excess determination means performs output determination of the excess signal when the operation means is in the first state on condition that the sound output from the sound output means is the effect sound, and the operation means The gaming machine according to Feature D4, wherein when the second state is in the second state, output determination of the excess signal is not performed.

  According to the feature D5, when the operation means is in the second state in the state in which the production sound is output from the sound output unit, even if the production sound is cracked, the process of eliminating the sound break Is not done. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the sound control means on condition that there is no problem even if it is not determined whether or not sound cracking has occurred.

  Feature D6. The amplification factor limiting means is capable of reducing the amplification factor according to the type of sound output from the sound output means even when the operation means is in the first state. The gaming machine according to any one of features D3 to D5.

  For example, for the effect sound, if the operation means is set to the first state for the purpose of giving priority to the elimination of the sound cracking over the holding of the loud volume, if the sound cracking occurs in the output sound, In addition to the notification sound, for example, the volume of the notification sound may be reduced to eliminate sound cracking, and the notification effect of the notification sound may be reduced. That is, depending on the type of sound output from the sound output means, the sound-specific effect may be reduced by reducing the volume for the purpose of eliminating sound cracking.

  On the other hand, according to the feature D6, even when the operation unit is in a state (first state) where priority is given to eliminating sound cracking over maintaining output volume, sound cracking is resolved depending on the type of output sound. It is forcibly prioritized to maintain or enhance the effect of the sound. For this reason, it can suppress that the specific effect with which a different kind of output sound each falls is reduced.

  Feature D7. The amplification factor limiting means sets the amplification factor even when the operation means is in the first state on condition that the sound output from the sound output means is a fraud sound for notifying the occurrence of fraud. The gaming machine according to Feature D6, wherein the gaming machine is not small.

  According to feature D7, when the output sound from the sound output means is a fraud sound, the output sound volume is forced to be maintained rather than the sound cracking eliminated so that the fraud prevention effect of the fraud sound does not decrease. Priority. As a result, the fraud prevention effect can be suitably exerted on the fraudulent sound regardless of the state of the operation means.

  The sound control means includes means for determining whether or not the sound signal input to the sound output means is a signal for outputting a fraud sound from the sound output means, and the amplification factor. The limiting means does not decrease the amplification factor even when the operation means is in the first state on the condition that the sound signal is determined to be a signal for outputting the fraud sound. It is preferable.

Feature D8. The sound volume level reducing means has excess determination means (function for executing the process of step S1703 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72) for determining whether or not the excess signal is output from the level excess detection circuit. And
The gaming machine according to Feature D7, wherein the excess determination means does not perform output determination of the excess signal when the sound output from the sound output means is the fraud sound.

  According to the feature D8, when a fraud sound is output from the sound output means, a process for eliminating the sound crack is performed even if the sound fraud occurs in the fraud sound regardless of the state of the operation means. Absent. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the sound control means on condition that there is no problem even if it is not determined whether or not sound cracking has occurred.

  Feature D9. The amplification factor limiting unit can reduce the amplification factor according to the type of sound output from the sound output unit even when the operation unit is in the second state. The gaming machine according to any one of features D3 to D8.

  For example, when the operation means is set to the second state for the purpose of prioritizing the improvement of the production effect over the elimination of the sound cracking for the production sound, even if the sound breakup occurs in the output sound, the production sound In addition, for example, the output volume of a voice message is not reduced, and it is difficult for a player to hear a voice message in which sound is broken. In other words, by giving priority to maintaining the output volume over sound cracking, depending on the type of sound output from the sound output means, there is a risk that the effect specific to that sound may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the feature D9, the output volume is maintained depending on the type of the output sound even when the operation unit is in a state (second state) in which the maintenance of the output volume is prioritized over the elimination of sound cracking. It is forcibly prioritized to maintain or enhance the effect of the sound by eliminating the sound cracking. For this reason, it can suppress that the peculiar effect which each different kind of output sound has falls.

  Feature D10. Even if the operation means is in the second state, the amplification factor limiting means is provided that the sound output from the sound output means is a guide sound for guiding the player to the state of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to Feature D9, wherein the gain is reduced.

  According to the feature D10, when the output sound from the sound output means is a guide sound, in order to prevent the guidance effect of the guide sound from deteriorating, the sound breaking is forcibly prioritized over maintaining the output volume. Is done. Thereby, for example, when the guidance sound is a voice message, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the voice message is broken and cannot be heard. That is, the guidance effect can be suitably exerted on the guidance sound regardless of the state of the operation means.

  The sound control means includes means for determining whether the sound signal input to the sound output means is a signal for outputting the guide sound from the sound output means, and the amplification factor. The limiting means reduces the amplification factor even when the operation means is in the second state on the condition that the sound signal is determined to be a signal for outputting the guidance sound. Is preferred.

Feature D11. The operation means can be switched to a plurality of states including the second state different from the first state,
The sound control means is
When the operation means is not in the first state, the first amplification factor setting means (the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72) sets the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplification means according to the state of the operation means. The game machine according to any one of features D3 to D10, wherein the game machine has a function of executing the process of step S1407.

  According to the feature D11, by operating the operation unit, it is possible to select which of the sound crack elimination and the output volume maintenance is to be prioritized and to change the output volume from the sound output unit. it can. In addition, since a switch for selecting whether to eliminate sound cracking and maintaining the output volume and a switch for adjusting the volume are collectively provided as operation means, these switches are provided separately. Compared to the configuration, the number of members for configuring the gaming machine can be reduced.

Feature D12. The sound control means is
When the operation means is in the first state and the excess signal is not output from the level excess detection circuit, an amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplification means is set to a predetermined value (amplifier 171). Any of the features D3 to D11, characterized in that it has second amplification factor setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1502 and 1702 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72). A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature D12, when the operation unit is in a state (first state) where priority is given to the elimination of sound cracking over the maintenance of the output volume, the output volume from the sound output unit is set to a predetermined volume. Is done. In this case, since the operation for setting the operating means to the first state also requires the operation for setting the output volume, the operation required for volume adjustment can be facilitated.

Feature D13. A gaming machine front body (front door frame 14) that constitutes a gaming machine front face and is rotatably provided in front of the gaming machine;
A gaming machine main body (inner frame 13) provided on the rear side of the gaming machine front body;
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D12, wherein the operating means is provided on a back side of the gaming machine main body.

  According to the feature D13, since it is difficult for the player to operate the operation means, the hall manager can suitably manage the state of the operation means.

Feature D14. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, whether or not to grant a privilege to a player is determined, and the player is granted a privilege based on the result of the determination. Main control means (main control device 71) for
The sound control means is a sub-control means for performing a predetermined notification process based on information output from the main control means,
The operation means is connected to the sound control means among the main control means and the sound control means, and outputs a signal indicating a state of the operation means to the sound control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D13.

  According to the feature D14, since a signal indicating the state of the operation unit is output from the operation unit to the sound control unit, even if an unauthorized substrate is connected to the sound control unit instead of the operation unit, It can be avoided that the main control means is controlled by the substrate and the privilege is illegally given. Thereby, a fraud countermeasure can be suitably given to the gaming machine provided with the operation means.

Feature D15. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, whether or not to grant a privilege to a player is determined, and the player is granted a privilege based on the result of the determination. Main control means (main control device 71) for
The sound control means is sub-control means (sound light control device 72) that performs a predetermined notification process based on information output from the main control means,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims D1 to D14, wherein the over-level detection circuit is connected to the sound control means of the main control means and the sound control means.

  According to the feature D15, since an excess signal indicating the occurrence of sound cracking is output from the over-level detection circuit to the sound control unit, even if an unauthorized board is connected to the sound control unit instead of the over-level detection circuit. It is possible to avoid that the main control means is controlled by the unauthorized board and the privilege is illegally granted. Thereby, a countermeasure against fraud can be suitably given to a gaming machine provided with an over-level detection circuit.

<Feature E group>
The invention of the following feature group E is effective for the following problems.

  In the case where a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a speaker as sound output means, a variety of performance sounds are output from the speaker according to the gaming state, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game. In addition, by outputting the notification sound from the speaker, it is possible to notify the state of the gaming machine or to notify the occurrence of fraud.

  The speaker outputs sound when a sound signal is input from the amplifier, and the sound volume output from the speaker is determined by setting the amplification factor of the sound signal by the amplifier. In a gaming machine in which the amplification factor of the amplifier is variably set, the output volume from the speaker can be changed according to the amplification factor of the amplifier. For example, in a gaming machine provided with a volume switch, the amplification factor of the amplifier is changed by operating the volume switch, and thereby the output volume from the speaker is changed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-320542). 2005-261808).

  However, when the volume level of the sound signal input to the speaker is higher than the allowable input level of the speaker, the sound output from the speaker may sound like a crack due to distortion of the waveform of the sound signal. In this case, the output sound that should enhance the gameability and convenience will give the player an unpleasant feeling.

  On the other hand, when the volume switch is operated so that the amplification factor of the amplifier becomes small, the volume level of the sound signal input to the speaker becomes small, and the sound cracking occurring in the speaker can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

  However, when a hall manager, a player, or the like operates the volume switch, the operation mode is not necessarily a mode suitable for sound cracking each time. For example, in a configuration in which the volume switch is arranged on the back side of the gaming machine, the amplifier is so large that the hall manager does not break the sound outside the business hall opening hours (for example, before opening, after closing, or on a regular holiday). Although it is assumed that the volume switch is operated so that the amplification factor of the sound becomes small, this does not eliminate the sound cracking in accordance with the timing at which the sound cracking actually occurs. In addition, in the configuration in which the volume switch is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, it becomes possible for the player to operate the volume switch during the game, but it is not necessary to operate the volume switch every time a sound break occurs. The operation frequency of the volume switch increases, which is not realistic for the player.

Feature E1. Amplifying means (amplifier 171) for amplifying the sound signal;
Sound output means (upper speaker 91, lower speaker 101) for outputting sound at a volume corresponding to the volume level of the sound signal by inputting the sound signal amplified by the amplification means;
An over-level detection circuit (sound crack detection circuit 175) for detecting that the sound signal amplified by the amplification means is input and that the volume level of the sound signal exceeds a predetermined reference level;
Sound control means for controlling the operation of the amplification means (sub-MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72);
With
When detecting that the volume level of the sound signal is larger than the reference level, the level excess detection circuit outputs an excess signal (sound break signal) indicating that to the sound control means. Yes,
The sound control means is
Whether or not the excess signal is output from the level excess detection circuit when the sound output from the sound output means is an effect sound for performing a predetermined game effect in a situation where the gaming machine is in a specific state A gaming machine characterized by having an excess determination means (function for executing the process of step S1703 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound control device 72).

  According to the feature E1, since the level excess detection circuit detects that the volume level of the sound signal input to the sound output means exceeds the reference level, if the reference level is set as the allowable input level of the sound output means. It can be detected as occurrence of sound cracking that the volume level of the sound signal exceeds the allowable input level of the sound output means.

  Moreover, since it is determined whether or not sound cracking has occurred for the effect sound output from the sound output means, when it is determined that sound cracking has occurred in the effect sound, It is possible to reduce the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplification means at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to suitably eliminate the occurrence of sound cracking. Furthermore, when sound cracking occurs in the production sound, whether or not to cancel the sound cracking can be properly used according to the gaming state or the like. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game playability depending on whether or not sound cracking is eliminated.

  As described above, it is possible to preferably eliminate the sound cracking generated in the effect sound output from the sound output means, and it is possible to enhance the effect using the sound cracking.

Feature E2. The sound control means is
Amplification rate limiting means (sound light control) for reducing the amplification rate of the sound signal in the amplification means in accordance with a predetermined timing when the output of the excess signal is judged by the excess judgment means The gaming machine according to Feature E1, further including a function of executing the process of step S1710 in the sub MPU 142 of the device 72.

  According to the feature E2, if the production sound is cracked, the volume of the production sound is reduced at a predetermined timing. Therefore, the sound is continued until the timing suitable for the content of the production sound and the game situation. It becomes possible to eliminate sound cracking. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by eliminating the sound cracking. On the other hand, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for jackpots in the game by making the timing for canceling the sound cracking of the production sound different from the start of the sound cracking always at a different timing Become.

Feature E3. The sound control means is
Specific effect determining means (function for executing the process of step S1709 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72) for determining whether or not to perform a specific effect (sound cracking effect) by the effect sound output from the sound output means; ,
When the output of the excess signal is determined by the excess determining means, before the amplification factor is reduced by the amplification factor limiting means, on condition that the specific effect is determined by the specific effect determining means. , Having amplification factor holding means (function to execute the process of step S1718 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound light control device 72) for holding the amplification factor without reducing it for a predetermined holding period (production sound breaking period La). The gaming machine according to Feature E2, characterized in that

  According to the feature E3, when a specific effect is performed by sound cracks generated in the effect sound, even if sound cracks occur in the effect sound, the sound cracks are not eliminated immediately, By continuing (only the holding period), it is possible to differentiate from the case where the specific performance is not performed. In this case, by continuing sound cracking, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for jackpots and the like compared to the case where sound cracking does not continue. That is, the phenomenon of sound cracking that would otherwise give the player discomfort can be used to enhance the effect.

  Here, since sound cracking is considered to occur due to distortion in the waveform of the sound signal, even if it is a production sound formed from one sound data, sound cracking occurs and does not occur In this case, the waveform of the sound output from the sound output means is different. That is, a plurality of types of effect sounds having different timbres are output using one sound data. In this case, since the types of effect sounds output from the sound output means increase without increasing the sound data stored in the storage means, the effect sound can be reproduced without increasing the capacity of the storage means. Diversification can be achieved, and as a result, the production effect by the production sound can be enhanced.

Feature E4. The sound control means is
In a state where the amplification factor is limited by the amplification factor limiting unit, the state where the amplification factor is limited is determined as a non-production limitation when the specific effect determination unit determines that the specific effect is not performed. Non-effect canceling means for canceling the amplification factor restriction by the amplification factor restricting means after continuing for a period (normal production period) (function of executing step S1912 in sub-MPU 142 of sound light control device 72) When,
In a state where the amplification factor is limited by the amplification factor limiting unit, when the specific effect determination unit determines that the specific effect is performed, the state where the amplification factor is limited is the non-production limitation. An effect release means (step in sub-MPU 142 of sound light control device 72) for releasing the restriction of the amplification factor by the amplification factor restriction means after continuing for a production restriction period (production restriction period Lb) shorter than the period. The function of executing the processing of S1905),
The gaming machine according to Feature E3, further comprising:

  According to the feature E4, when the specific effect due to the sound cracking is not performed, the duration of the volume restriction is relatively long, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the sound cracking again at the timing when the volume restriction is released. . In this case, since it is difficult to repeat the execution and release of the volume restriction, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of sound cracking in the effect sound.

  On the other hand, when a specific effect due to sound cracking is performed, since the duration of volume restriction is relatively short, it is possible to make a situation in which sound cracking easily occurs again by releasing the volume restriction. In this case, since it is easy to repeat the execution and release of the volume restriction, the player can easily recognize that the repetition is intentional. That is, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the player can easily recognize that the specific effect due to sound cracking is performed.

  Feature E5. When the specific effect is performed during game play, the holding period in which the gain holding means holds the gain without reducing the gain, and the effect releasing means continues the state in which the gain is limited. The gaming machine according to Feature E4, characterized in that a total of the limited period for production to be performed is smaller than ½ of a required period required for one game time.

  According to the feature E5, since it is possible to repeat the execution and release of the volume restriction a plurality of times in one game time, the player further recognizes that a specific effect due to sound cracking is being performed. It becomes easy to do.

  Note that one game time is from the start of the variable display of the pattern by the pattern display device to the display of the stop result of the variable display.

  Feature E6. The effect canceling means and the non-effect canceling means end the game times when the specific effect is performed during the game and the gain is limited by the gain limiting means. The gaming machine according to feature E4 or E5, wherein the amplification factor restriction by the amplification factor restriction means is released at a timing.

  According to the feature E6, it can be avoided that the specific effect using the sound cracking is continuously performed after the game round is ended. In this case, the effect sound between when the game is played and when it is not played can be differentiated by the specific effect. For this reason, the expectation degree in game play can be raised suitably by specific production.

Feature E7. A pattern display device (symbol display device 41) for performing variable display of a plurality of types of patterns;
The picture display device is configured to display the stop result after starting the change display of the plurality of kinds of patterns when the conditions for starting the change of the plurality of kinds of pictures are satisfied and displaying the change according to a preset change mode. Display control means (display control device 128) for display control,
With
The amplification factor holding means displays the variation display on the picture display device when it is determined that the output of the excess signal is determined by the excess determination means and the specific effect is determined by the specific effect determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E3 to E6, characterized in that the amplification factor is held without being reduced only during the holding period on the condition that it is performed.

  According to the feature E7, in the situation where sound cracking occurs in the production sound while the change display of the pattern is being performed, the sound cracking is resolved quickly, and the sound cracking is not resolved immediately. The occurrence of sound cracking can be differentiated from the case where it is resolved after it is continued. In particular, while the variable display is being performed, it is a timing that the player expects for the stop result of the variable display, and the player's expectation can be further enhanced by a specific effect using sound cracking. .

Feature E8. In the variation display mode displayed on the pattern display device, other patterns except for the final stop pattern among the patterns in which a combination of patterns determined to give a privilege to the player may be established, Reach variation display is included to display the final stop pattern in a variable state under the condition that the variable display is stopped after the start.
The amplification factor holding means is configured to display the reach variation display on the picture display device when it is determined that the output of the excess signal is determined by the excess determination means and the specific effect is determined by the specific effect determination means. The gaming machine according to feature E7, characterized in that the amplification factor is held without being reduced only during the holding period on the condition that is performed.

  Since the reach variation display has a higher expectation for the stop result than other variation displays, a specific effect using sound cracking is performed when the reach variation display is performed as in the feature E6. Is effective in enhancing game playability. Moreover, even if the reach variation display in the same mode is differentiated between the case where the specific effect due to sound cracking is performed and the case where it is not performed, the effect of the effect during the reach variation display is further increased. Can be increased.

Feature E9. The reach variation display mode includes a first reach variation display (normal reach A and B) and a second reach variation display (super reach A to C) having a variation display period longer than the first reach variation display. And
The amplification factor holding means determines that the output signal of the excess signal is determined by the excess determination means, and the second reach is performed by the pattern display device when the specific effect determination means determines that the specific effect is to be performed. The gaming machine according to Feature E8, wherein the gaming machine is held without reducing the amplification factor for the holding period on condition that a variable display is performed.

  Since the second reach variation display has a higher expectation for the stop result than the first reach variation display, the identification using sound cracking is performed when the second reach variation display is performed as in the feature E9. It is effective to improve the game performance. And even if it is the 2nd reach fluctuation display of the same mode, since it is differentiated by the case where the specific production by sound cracking is performed and the case where it is not performed, the 2nd reach fluctuation display is being performed. The production effect can be further enhanced.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes gaming components arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion among the gaming components.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 13 ... Inner frame as a gaming machine main body, 14 ... Front door frame as a front body of gaming machine, 71 ... Main control device as main control means, 72 ... Sound having sound control means Light control device, 87 ... ROM for common use as storage means, 91 ... Upper speaker as sound output means and upper sound output means, 101 ... Lower speaker as sound output means and lower sound output means, 111 ... Operation means Volume switch as 112, operation knob as variable operation unit, 135 as speaker path as sound output path, 142 as sub MPU as sound control means and sub control means, 171 as amplifier as amplification means, 175 as level Sound crack detection circuit as an excess detection circuit, 176 ... branch path, 182 ... peak hold unit as peak holding means, 183 ... reset means, 191 ... 192... Diode as a rectifier, 193... Buffer unit, 194... Operational amplifier, 201... Voltage generator, 202... Comparator as a comparison means, 203. An oscillation circuit as reset execution means, R1... First resistance, R2... Second resistance as variable resistance constituting variable setting means.

Claims (1)

Amplifying means for amplifying the sound signal;
Sound output means for outputting sound at a volume corresponding to the volume level of the sound signal by inputting the sound signal amplified by the amplification means;
With
The amplifying means and the sound output means are electrically connected by a sound output path, and the sound signal amplified by the amplifying means is input to the sound output means through the sound output path. There,
The sound signal amplified by the amplification means is input through the branch path, and the volume level of the sound signal exceeds a predetermined reference level. Equipped with an over-level detection circuit that detects
The over-level detection circuit includes:
Peak holding means for holding the peak value of the volume level of the sound signal as a hold value;
Comparing means for comparing the hold value held by the peak holding means with the reference level,
Gaming machine, characterized in der Rukoto which detects that the volume level of the sound signal based on a comparison result of the comparing means exceeds the reference level.

Images